MOTOROLA DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING DEVELOPMENT SOFTWARE
MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL
Motorola, Incorporated Semiconductor Products Sector DSP Division 6501 William Cannon Drive West Austin, TX, 78735-8598 Specification and information herein are subject to change without notice. Motorola re- serves the right to make changes without further notice to any products described in this document to improve reliability, function, or design. Motorola does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any product or circuit described herein, neither does it convey any license under its patent rights or the rights of others. Motorola is a registered trademark of Motorola, Inc. Motorola, Inc. is an Equal Employment/Affirmative Action Em- ployer. This manual documents the assembler as of version 6.0 of the software. © Copyright Motorola, Inc. 1996. All rights reserved.
ASM56000, SIM56000, ASM96000, SIM96000, ASM56100, SIM56100, ASM56300, SIM56300, ASM56800 and SIM56800 are trademarks of Motorola. MS-DOS and Windows are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Sun-4 and SunOS are trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. Macintosh and MPW are trademarks of Apple Computer. MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER 1
WRITING ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE PROGRAMS 2
EXPRESSIONS 3
SOFTWARE PROJECT MANAGEMENT 4
MACROS AND CONDITIONAL ASSEMBLY 5
ASSEMBLER CHARACTERS AND DIRECTIVES 6
STRUCTURED CONTROL STATEMENTS 7
ASCII CHARACTER CODES A
DIRECTIVE SUMMARY B
ASSEMBLER MESSAGES C
ASSEMBLER LISTING FILE FORMAT D
MOTOROLA DSP OBJECT FILE FORMAT (COFF) E
DEVICE-DEPENDENT INFORMATION F
HOST-DEPENDENT INFORMATION G
INDEX I 1 MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER
2 WRITING ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE PROGRAMS
3 EXPRESSIONS
4 SOFTWARE PROJECT MANAGEMENT
5 MACROS AND CONDITIONAL ASSEMBLY
6 ASSEMBLER CHARACTERS AND DIRECTIVES
7 STRUCTURED CONTROL STATEMENTS
A ASCII CHARACTER CODES
B DIRECTIVE SUMMARY
C ASSEMBLER MESSAGES
D ASSEMBLER LISTING FILE FORMAT
E MOTOROLA DSP OBJECT FILE FORMAT (COFF)
F DEVICE-DEPENDENT INFORMATION
G HOST-DEPENDENT INFORMATION
I INDEX Preface
PREFACE
Notation The notational conventions used in this manual are: DIRECTIVE All assembler mnemonics and directives are shown in bold upper case to highlight them. However, the assembler will recognize both upper and lower case for mne- monics and directives. { } Contains a list of elements or directives, one of which must be selected. Each choice will be separated by a vertical bar. For example, {R I L} indicates that either R or L must be selected. [ ] Contains one or more optional elements. If more than one optional element is shown, the required element separators are indicated. All elements outside of the angle brackets (< >) must be specified as they appear. For example, the syntacti- cal element [
MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL i Preface
< > The element names are printed in lower case and contained in angle brackets. Some common elements used to describe directives are:
Supporting Publications
DSP56000 Family Manual. Motorola, Inc. 1992. DSP96002 User’s Manual. Motorola, Inc. 1989. DSP56100 Family Manual. Motorola, Inc. 1993. DSP56300 Family Manual. Motorola, Inc. 1995. DSP56800 Family Manual. Motorola, Inc. 1996. Motorola DSP Simulator Reference Manual. Motorola, Inc. 1996. Motorola DSP Linker/Librarian Reference Manual. Motorola, Inc. 1996.
ii DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA TABLE OF CONTENTS
PREFACE TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES
Chapter 1 MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER 1.1 INTRODUCTION ...... 1-1 1.2 ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE ...... 1-1 1.3 INSTALLING THE ASSEMBLER ...... 1-1 1.4 RUNNING THE ASSEMBLER ...... 1-1 1.5 ASSEMBLER OPTIONS ...... 1-3 1.6 ASSEMBLER PROCESSING ...... 1-9 1.7 DEFINITION OF TERMS ...... 1-9 1.8 ASSEMBLER SUPPORT FOR DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING ...... 1-10
Chapter 2 WRITING ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE PROGRAMS 2.1 INPUT FILE FORMAT ...... 2-1 2.2 SYMBOL NAMES ...... 2-1 2.3 STRINGS ...... 2-2 2.4 SOURCE STATEMENT FORMAT ...... 2-2 2.4.1 Label Field ...... 2-3 2.4.2 Operation Field ...... 2-4 2.4.3 Operand Field ...... 2-5 2.4.4 Operation 2 Field ...... 2-5 2.4.5 Operand 2 Field ...... 2-5 2.4.6 Data Transfer Fields ...... 2-5 2.4.7 Comment Field ...... 2-6 2.5 ASSEMBLER OUTPUT ...... 2-6
Chapter 3 EXPRESSIONS 3.1 INTRODUCTION ...... 3-1
MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL iii Table of Contents
3.2 ABSOLUTE AND RELATIVE EXPRESSIONS ...... 3-1 3.3 EXPRESSION MEMORY SPACE ATTRIBUTE ...... 3-1 3.4 INTERNAL EXPRESSION REPRESENTATION ...... 3-3 3.5 CONSTANTS ...... 3-3 3.5.1 Numeric Constants ...... 3-3 3.5.2 String Constants ...... 3-4 3.6 OPERATORS ...... 3-4 3.6.1 Unary operators...... 3-4 3.6.2 Arithmetic operators...... 3-5 3.6.3 Shift operators ...... 3-5 3.6.4 Relational operators...... 3-6 3.6.5 Bitwise operators ...... 3-6 3.6.6 Logical operators ...... 3-7 3.7 OPERATOR PRECEDENCE ...... 3-7 3.8 FUNCTIONS ...... 3-7 3.8.1 Mathematical Functions...... 3-8 3.8.2 Conversion Functions ...... 3-9 3.8.3 String Functions...... 3-9 3.8.4 Macro Functions ...... 3-9 3.8.5 Assembler Mode Functions ...... 3-10
Chapter 4 SOFTWARE PROJECT MANAGEMENT 4.1 INTRODUCTION ...... 4-1 4.2 SECTIONS ...... 4-1 4.3 SECTIONS AND DATA HIDING ...... 4-2 4.3.1 Sections and Symbols ...... 4-2 4.3.2 Sections and Macros ...... 4-4 4.3.3 Nested and Fragmented Sections ...... 4-4 4.4 SECTIONS AND RELOCATION ...... 4-5 4.5 ADDRESS ASSIGNMENT ...... 4-6 4.5.1 The ORG Directive ...... 4-7 4.5.2 Overlays...... 4-9 4.5.3 Address Assignment Examples...... 4-10 4.5.4 Circular Buffers ...... 4-11 4.6 EXAMPLE 1: MULTI-PROGRAMMER ENVIRONMENT ...... 4-13 4.6.1 Absolute Mode Implementation ...... 4-14 iv DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Table of Contents
4.6.2 Relative Mode Implementation ...... 4-15 4.7 EXAMPLE 2: OVERLAYS ...... 4-16 4.7.1 Absolute Mode Implementation ...... 4-17 4.7.2 Relative Mode Implementation ...... 4-18 4.8 EXAMPLE 3: BOOTSTRAP OVERLAY ...... 4-20 4.8.1 Absolute Mode Implementation ...... 4-21 4.8.2 Relative Mode Implementation ...... 4-21
Chapter 5 MACRO OPERATIONS AND CONDITIONAL ASSEMBLY 5.1 MACRO OPERATIONS ...... 5-1 5.2 MACRO LIBRARIES ...... 5-2 5.3 MACRO DEFINITION ...... 5-2 5.4 MACRO CALLS ...... 5-4 5.5 DUMMY ARGUMENT OPERATORS ...... 5-5 5.5.1 Dummy argument concatenation operator - \ ...... 5-5 5.5.2 Return value operator - ? ...... 5-6 5.5.3 Return hex value operator - % ...... 5-7 5.5.4 Dummy argument string operator - "...... 5-7 5.5.5 Macro local label override operator - ^ ...... 5-8 5.6 DUP, DUPA, DUPC, DUPF DIRECTIVES ...... 5-9 5.7 CONDITIONAL ASSEMBLY ...... 5-9
Chapter 6 ASSEMBLER SIGNIFICANT CHARACTERS AND DIRECTIVES 6.1 INTRODUCTION ...... 6-1 6.2 ASSEMBLER SIGNIFICANT CHARACTERS ...... 6-1 6.3 ASSEMBLER DIRECTIVES ...... 6-2 6.3.1 Assembly Control ...... 6-2 6.3.2 Symbol Definition ...... 6-3 6.3.3 Data Definition/Storage Allocation ...... 6-3 6.3.4 Listing Control and Options...... 6-3 6.3.5 Object File Control ...... 6-4 6.3.6 Macros and Conditional Assembly ...... 6-4 6.3.7 Structured Programming...... 6-4
MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL v Table of Contents
Chapter 7 STRUCTURED CONTROL STATEMENTS 7.1 INTRODUCTION ...... 7-1 7.2 STRUCTURED CONTROL DIRECTIVES ...... 7-1 7.3 SYNTAX ...... 7-2 7.3.1 .BREAK Statement ...... 7-2 7.3.2 .CONTINUE Statement ...... 7-3 7.3.3 .FOR Statement...... 7-4 7.3.4 .IF Statement ...... 7-5 7.3.5 .LOOP Statement ...... 7-6 7.3.6 .REPEAT Statement ...... 7-7 7.3.7 .WHILE Statement...... 7-7 7.4 SIMPLE AND COMPOUND EXPRESSIONS ...... 7-8 7.4.1 Simple Expressions ...... 7-8 7.4.1.1 Condition Code Expressions ...... 7-8 7.4.1.2 Operand Comparison Expressions ...... 7-9 7.4.2 Compound Expressions...... 7-10 7.5 STATEMENT FORMATTING ...... 7-10 7.5.1 Expression Formatting...... 7-10 7.5.2 .FOR/.LOOP Formatting ...... 7-11 7.5.3 Assembly Listing Format ...... 7-11 7.6 EFFECTS ON THE PROGRAMMER’S ENVIRONMENT ...... 7-11
Appendix A ASCII CHARACTER CODES
Appendix B DIRECTIVE SUMMARY B.1 ASSEMBLY CONTROL ...... B-1 B.2 SYMBOL DEFINITION ...... B-2 B.3 DATA DEFINITION/STORAGE ALLOCATION...... B-2 B.4 LISTING CONTROL AND OPTIONS ...... B-2 B.5 OBJECT FILE CONTROL...... B-3 B.6 MACROS AND CONDITIONAL ASSEMBLY ...... B-3 B.7 STRUCTURED PROGRAMMING ...... B-3
vi DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Table of Contents
Appendix C ASSEMBLER MESSAGES C.1 INTRODUCTION ...... C-1 C.2 COMMAND LINE ERRORS...... C-2 C.3 WARNINGS ...... C-4 C.4 ERRORS ...... C-13 C.5 FATAL ERRORS ...... C-44
Appendix D ASSEMBLER LISTING FILE FORMAT D.1 INTRODUCTION ...... D-1 D.2 LISTING FILE COMMENTARY ...... D-1 D.3 CROSS-REFERENCE FORMAT...... D-3 D.4 MEMORY UTILIZATION REPORT FORMAT ...... D-3 D.5 ASSEMBLER LISTING FORMAT ...... D-5
Appendix E MOTOROLA DSP OBJECT FILE FORMAT (COFF) E.1 INTRODUCTION ...... E-1 E.2 OBJECT FILE STRUCTURE ...... E-1 E.3 OBJECT FILE COMPONENTS ...... E-3 E.3.1 File Header ...... E-3 E.3.2 Optional Header ...... E-4 E.3.3 Sections ...... E-6 E.3.3.1 Section Headers ...... E-7 E.3.3.2 Relocation Information...... E-9 E.3.3.3 Line Numbers ...... E-10 E.3.4 Symbol Table ...... E-11 E.3.4.1 Symbol Name ...... E-13 E.3.4.2 Symbol Value ...... E-13 E.3.4.3 Section Number...... E-14 E.3.4.4 Symbol Type ...... E-14 E.3.4.5 Symbol Storage Class...... E-16 E.3.4.6 Auxiliary Entries...... E-20 E.3.4.6.1 Filenames ...... E-21 E.3.4.6.2 Sections ...... E-21 E.3.4.6.3 Tag Names ...... E-23
MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL vii Table of Contents
E.3.4.6.4 End of Structures ...... E-23 E.3.4.6.5 Functions ...... E-24 E.3.4.6.6 Arrays ...... E-25 E.3.4.6.7 End of Blocks and Functions ...... E-25 E.3.4.6.8 Beginning of Blocks and Functions ...... E-26 E.3.4.6.9 Structure, Union, and Enumeration Names ...... E-26 E.3.4.7 Object File Comments ...... E-27 E.3.5 String Table ...... E-27 E.4 DIFFERENCES IN DSP OBJECT FORMAT AND STANDARD COFF . . E-27 E.4.1 Multiple Memory Spaces ...... E-28 E.4.2 Object File Transportability ...... E-29 E.4.3 Structure Size Fields ...... E-30 E.4.4 Relocation Information...... E-30 E.4.5 Block Data Sections...... E-31 E.4.6 Other Extensions ...... E-31 E.5 OBJECT FILE DATA EXPRESSION FORMAT ...... E-31 E.5.1 Data Expression Generation ...... E-32 E.5.2 Data Expression Interpretation ...... E-32 E.5.2.1 User Expression - { ... } ...... E-33 E.5.2.2 Relocatable Expression - [ ... ] ...... E-33 E.5.2.3 Memory Space Operator - @ ...... E-33 E.5.2.4 Bit Size Operator - #...... E-33 E.5.2.5 Memory Attribute Operator - :...... E-34 E.5.2.6 Line Number Operator - ! ...... E-34 E.5.2.7 BFxxx Instruction Mask Function - @FBF() ...... E-35 E.5.2.8 Local Relocatable Reference Function - @LRF() ...... E-35 E.5.2.9 Alternate Encoding Function - @ENC() ...... E-35
Appendix F DEVICE-DEPENDENT INFORMATION F.1 INTRODUCTION...... F-1 F.2 DSP56000 INFORMATION...... F-2 F.2.1 Instruction Set Summary ...... F-2 F.2.1.1 Arithmetic Instructions ...... F-3 F.2.1.2 Logical Instructions ...... F-4 F.2.1.3 Bit Manipulation Instructions ...... F-4 F.2.1.4 Loop Instructions ...... F-4 viii DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Table of Contents
F.2.1.5 Move Instructions ...... F-4 F.2.1.6 Program Control Instructions ...... F-5 F.2.2 Register Names and Usage ...... F-6 F.2.3 Condition Code Mnemonics ...... F-7 F.3 DSP96000 INFORMATION ...... F-8 F.3.1 Instruction Set Summary...... F-8 F.3.1.1 Arithmetic Instructions ...... F-8 F.3.1.2 Logical Instructions ...... F-10 F.3.1.3 Bit Manipulation Instructions ...... F-10 F.3.1.4 Loop Instructions ...... F-10 F.3.1.5 Move Instructions ...... F-11 F.3.1.6 Program Control Instructions ...... F-12 F.3.2 Register Names and Usage ...... F-13 F.3.3 Condition Code Mnemonics ...... F-14 F.4 DSP56100 INFORMATION ...... F-15 F.4.1 Instruction Set Summary...... F-15 F.4.1.1 Arithmetic Instructions ...... F-15 F.4.1.2 Logical Instructions ...... F-16 F.4.1.3 Bit Manipulation Instructions ...... F-17 F.4.1.4 Loop Instructions ...... F-17 F.4.1.5 Move Instructions ...... F-17 F.4.1.6 Program Control Instructions ...... F-18 F.4.2 Register Names and Usage ...... F-18 F.4.3 Condition Code Mnemonics ...... F-19 F.5 DSP56300 INFORMATION ...... F-20 F.5.1 Instruction Set Summary...... F-20 F.5.1.1 Arithmetic Instructions ...... F-21 F.5.1.2 Logical Instructions ...... F-22 F.5.1.3 Bit Manipulation Instructions ...... F-22 F.5.1.4 Loop Instructions ...... F-23 F.5.1.5 Move Instructions ...... F-23 F.5.1.6 Program Control Instructions ...... F-24 F.5.2 Register Names and Usage ...... F-25 F.5.3 Condition Code Mnemonics ...... F-26 F.6 DSP56800 INFORMATION ...... F-27 F.6.1 Instruction Set Summary...... F-27
MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL ix Table of Contents
F.6.1.1 Arithmetic Instructions ...... F-28 F.6.1.2 Logical Instructions ...... F-29 F.6.1.3 Bit Manipulation Instructions ...... F-29 F.6.1.4 Loop Instructions ...... F-29 F.6.1.5 Move Instructions ...... F-30 F.6.1.6 Program Control Instructions ...... F-30 F.6.2 Macro Instructions ...... F-31 F.6.3 Register Names and Usage...... F-32 F.6.4 Condition Code Mnemonics...... F-32
Appendix G HOST-DEPENDENT INFORMATION G.1 INTRODUCTION...... G-1 G.2 DOS/386 ENVIRONMENT ...... G-1 G.2.1 Hardware Requirements ...... G-1 G.2.2 Installation ...... G-2 G.2.3 Source File Text...... G-2 G.2.4 Invoking the Assembler ...... G-2 G.3 SUNOS ENVIRONMENT ...... G-3 G.3.1 Hardware Requirements ...... G-3 G.3.2 Installation ...... G-3 G.3.3 Source File Text...... G-4 G.3.4 Invoking the Assembler ...... G-4 G.4 HP 700 ENVIRONMENT...... G-4 G.4.1 Hardware Requirements ...... G-4 G.4.2 Installation ...... G-5 G.4.3 Source File Text...... G-5 G.4.4 Invoking the Assembler ...... G-5 G.5 MACINTOSH ENVIRONMENT...... G-6 G.5.1 Hardware Requirements ...... G-6 G.5.2 Installation ...... G-6 G.5.3 Source File Text...... G-6 G.5.4 Invoking the Assembler ...... G-7
Index
x DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA List of Figures
LIST OF FIGURES
D-1 Assembler Listing Format ...... D-5 D-2 Assembler Cross-reference Listing Format ...... D-14 D-3 Assembler Listing Line Format ...... D-15 D-4 Memory Utilization Report Format ...... D-16 D-5 Memory Utilization Report Source ...... D-18 E-1 COFF File Basic Structure ...... E-2 E-2 File Header Format ...... E-3 E-3 File Header Flags ...... E-4 E-4 Motorola DSP Optional Link Header Format ...... E-5 E-5 Motorola DSP Optional Runtime Header Format ...... E-6 E-6 Section Header Format ...... E-7 E-7 Section Header Flags ...... E-9 E-8 Relocation Entry Format ...... E-10 E-9 Line Number Entry Format ...... E-10 E-10 Line Number Grouping ...... E-11 E-11 COFF Symbol Table Ordering ...... E-12 E-12 Symbol Table Entry Format ...... E-13 E-13 Fundamental Types ...... E-15 E-14 Derived Types ...... E-16 E-15 Storage Classes ...... E-17 E-16 Storage Class and Value ...... E-19 E-17 Filename Symbol Auxiliary Entry ...... E-21 E-18 Section Symbol Auxiliary Entry ...... E-21 E-19 Relocatable Section Auxiliary Entry ...... E-22 E-20 Relocatable Buffer/Overlay Auxiliary Entry ...... E-22 E-21 Tag Name Symbol Auxiliary Entry ...... E-23 E-22 End of Structure Auxiliary Entry ...... E-24
MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL xi List of Figures
E-23 Function Symbol Auxiliary Entry ...... E-24 E-24 Array Symbol Auxiliary Entry ...... E-25 E-25 End of Block or Function Auxiliary Entry ...... E-25 E-26 Beginning of Block or Function Auxiliary Entry ...... E-26 E-27 Structure, Union, or Enumeration Name Auxiliary Entry ...... E-27 E-28 CORE_ADDR Format ...... E-28 E-29 Memory Mapping Enumerations ...... E-29 E-30 Motorola DSP COFF Byte Ordering ...... E-30
xii DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Chapter 1 MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER
1.1 INTRODUCTION The Motorola DSP Assemblers are programs that process assembly language source statements written for Motorola’s family of digital signal processors. The Assembler trans- lates these source statements into object programs compatible with other Motorola DSP software and hardware products.
1.2 ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE The assembly language provides mnemonic operation codes for all machine instructions in the digital signal processor instruction set. In addition, the assembly language contains mnemonic directives which specify auxiliary actions to be performed by the Assembler. These directives are not always translated into machine language. The assembly lan- guage enables the programmer to define and use macro instructions which replace a sin- gle statement with a predefined sequence of statements found in the macro definition. Conditional assembly also is supported.
1.3 INSTALLING THE ASSEMBLER The Assembler is distributed on various media and in different formats depending on the host environment. See Appendix G, Host-dependent Information, for details on installing and operating the Assembler on your particular machine.
1.4 RUNNING THE ASSEMBLER The general format of the command line to invoke the Assembler is: DSPASM [options]
MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL 1-1 Motorola DSP Assembler Running The Assembler ple, for the Motorola DSP56000 processor the name of the Assembler executable is ASM56000. [options] Any of the following command line options. These can be in any order, but must precede the list of source filenames. Some options can be given more than once; the individual descriptions indicate which options may be speci- fied multiple times. Option letters can be in either upper or lower case. Command options that are used regularly may be placed in the environment variable DSPASMOPT. If the variable is found in the environment the As- sembler adds the associated text to the existing command line prior to pro- cessing any options. See your host documentation for instructions on how to define environment variables. Option arguments may immediately follow the option letter or may be sepa- rated from the option letter by blanks or tabs. However, an ambiguity arises if an option takes an optional argument. Consider the following command line: ASM56000 -B MAIN IO In this example it is not clear whether the file MAIN is a source file or is meant to be an argument to the -B option. If the ambiguity is not resolved the Assembler will assume that MAIN is a source file and attempt to open it for reading. This may not be what the programmer intended. There are several ways to avoid this ambiguity. If MAIN is supposed to be an argument to the -B option it can be placed immediately after the option letter: ASM56000 -BMAIN IO If there are other options on the command line besides those that take op- tional arguments the other options can be placed between the ambiguous option and the list of source file names: ASM56000 -B MAIN -V IO An alternative is to use two successive hyphens to indicate the end of the option list: ASM56000 -B -- MAIN IO In this latter case the Assembler interprets MAIN as a source file name and uses the default naming conventions for the -B option.
1-2 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Motorola DSP Assembler Assembler Options 1.5 ASSEMBLER OPTIONS -A Indicates that the Assembler should run in absolute mode, generating an absolute object file when the -B command line option is given. By default the Assembler produces a relocatable object file that is subsequently pro- cessed by the Motorola DSP linker. See Chapter 4, Software Project Man- agement, for more information on Assembler modes. -B[
MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL 1-3 Motorola DSP Assembler Assembler Options -D
1-4 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Motorola DSP Assembler Assembler Options -G Send source file line number information to the object file. This option is val- id only in conjunction with the -B command line option. The generated line number information can be used by debuggers to provide source-level de- bugging. Example: ASM56000 -B -G myprog.asm Assemble the file MYPROG.ASM and send source file line number information to the resulting object file MYPROG.CLN. -I
MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL 1-5 Motorola DSP Assembler Assembler Options only once. If the file named in the -L option already exists, it will be overwritten. Example: ASM96000 -L filter.asm gauss.asm In this example, the files FILTER.ASM and GAUSS.ASM are assem- bled together to produce a listing file. Because no filename was giv- en with the -L option, the output file will be named using the basename of the first source file, in this case FILTER. The listing file will be called FILTER.LST. -M
Run the Assembler with the specified processor revision level enhance- ments. This is for backward compatibility so that the Assembler will flag new constructions as illegal.
1-6 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Motorola DSP Assembler Assembler Options below. Note that if this option is not used the Assembler runs with all latest revision level enhancements on by default.
Processor Identifier DSP56001 Rev. C 56001c DSP56002 56002 DSP56004 56004 DSP56166 56166 DSP96001 Rev. B 96001b DSP96002 96002 Example: ASM56000 -P56001c myprog.asm Assemble MYPROG.ASM with the DSP56000 Revision C enhance- ments. -Q On some hosts the Assembler displays a banner on the console when in- voked. This option inhibits the banner display. It has no effect on hosts where the signon banner is not displayed by default. Example: ASM56000 -Q myprog.asm Assemble the file MYPROG.ASM but do not display the signon ban- ner on the console. -R
Run the Assembler without the specified processor revision level enhance- ments. This is for backward compatibility so that the Assembler will flag new constructions as illegal.
Processor Revision DSP56001 Rev. C C DSP56002 2 DSP56004 4 DSP56166 6 DSP96000 Rev. B B DSP96001 1 Example: ASM56000 -RC myprog.asm Assemble MYPROG.ASM without the DSP56000 Revision C en- hancements.
MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL 1-7 Motorola DSP Assembler Assembler Options -V This option causes the Assembler to report assembly progress (beginning of passes, opening and closing of input files) to the standard error output stream. This is useful to insure that assembly is proceeding normally. Example: ASM56000 -V myprog.asm Assemble the file MYPROG.ASM and send progress lines to the standard error output. -Z This option causes the Assembler to strip symbol information from the ab- solute load file. Normally symbol information is retained in the object file for symbolic reference purposes. Note that this option is valid only when the Assembler is in absolute mode via the -A command line option and when an object file is created (-B option). Example: ASM56000 -A -B -Z myprog.asm Assemble the file MYPROG.ASM in absolute mode and strip symbol information from the load file created as output.
1-8 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Motorola DSP Assembler Assembler Processing 1.6 ASSEMBLER PROCESSING The Motorola DSP Assembler is a two-pass Assembler. During the first pass the source program is read to build the symbol and macro tables. During the second pass the object file is generated (assembled) with reference to the tables created during pass one. It is also during the second pass that the source program listing is produced. Each source statement is processed completely before the next source statement is read. As each line is read in, any translations specified by the DEFINE directive are applied. Each statement is then processed, and the Assembler examines the label, operation code, operand, and data transfer fields. The macro definition table is scanned for a match with the operation code. If there is no match, the operation code and directive tables are scanned for a match with a known opcode. Any errors detected by the Assembler are displayed before the actual line containing the error is printed. Errors and warnings are accumulated, and a total number of errors and warnings is printed at the end of the source listing. If no source listing is produced, error messages are still displayed to indicate that the assembly process did not proceed nor- mally. The number of errors is returned as an exit status when the Assembler returns con- trol to the host operating system.
1.7 DEFINITION OF TERMS Since the Motorola DSP architectures are different from normal microprocessors, the pro- grammer may not be familiar with some of the terms used in this document. The following discussion serves to clarify some of the concepts discussed later in this manual. The Motorola DSP architecture can have as many as five separate memory spaces re- ferred to as the X, Y, L, P (Program), and E (EMI - Extended Memory Interface) memory spaces. L memory space is a concatenation of X and Y data memory and is considered by the Assembler as a superset of the X and Y memory spaces. E memory is specific to the DSP56004 processor, and provides for different data representations for various memory hardware configurations. The Assembler will generate object code for each memory space, but object code can only be generated for one memory space at a time.
The memory space and address location into which the object code generated by the As- sembler will be loaded are referred to as the load memory space and load address, re- spectively. Because the DSP architecture allows data transfers between memory spaces, sometimes object code is loaded into an address of one memory space but will later be transferred to a different memory space and address before the program is run. One ex- ample of this might be a program located in an external EPROM that will be transferred into external program RAM before it is run. The transfer of code/data from one memory space/address to a different memory space/address is called an overlay. When the object code for a part of the program is generated that later will be used as an overlay, the load memory space and load address do not correspond to the memory space and address where the program will be run. The memory space and address loca- tion where the code/data will be located when the program is run are referred to as the
MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL 1-9 Motorola DSP Assembler Assembler Support For Digital Signal Processing runtime memory space and runtime address, respectively. If the Assembler only used the load address to assign values to labels, then the program would not contain the cor- rect label references when it was transferred to the runtime memory space and the run- time address. During the assembly process, the Assembler uses location counters to record the ad- dresses associated with the object code. In order to facilitate the generation of object code for overlays, the Assembler maintains two different location counters, the load location counter, which determines the address into which the object code will be loaded and the runtime location counter, which determines the address assigned to labels. In addition, the Assembler keeps track of the load memory space, which is the memory space into which the object code will be loaded, and the runtime memory space, which is the mem- ory space to which an overlay will be transferred and the memory space attribute that will be assigned to labels. See Chapter 4, Software Project Management, for a practical dis- cussion of the use of memory spaces and location counters. The Motorola digital signal processors are capable of performing operations on modulo and reverse-carry buffers, two data structures useful in digital signal processing applica- tions. The DSP Assembler provides directives for establishing buffer base addresses, al- locating buffer space, and initializing buffer contents. For a buffer to be located properly in memory the lower bits of the starting address which encompass one less than the buffer size must be zero. For example, the lowest address greater than zero at which a buffer of size 32 may be located is 32 (20 hexadecimal). More generally, the buffer base address must be a multiple of 2k, where 2k is greater than or equal to the size of the buffer. Buffers can be allocated manually or by using the Assembler buffer directives (see Chapter 6). The Assembler operates in either absolute or relative mode, depending on the presence of the command line -A option. In relative mode the Assembler creates relocatable object files. These files can be combined and relocated using the Motorola DSP linker. In ab- solute mode the Assembler generates absolute object files. Absolute files cannot be re- located but can be loaded directly for execution. By default the Assembler runs in relative mode.
1.8 ASSEMBLER SUPPORT FOR DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING As mentioned previously, the Assembler offers facilities commonly found in other macro Assemblers, such as nested macro capabilities, include files, and conditional assembly. The Assembler must also provide extensions in support of the unconventional architec- ture of the Motorola digital signal processors, as well as aids for programming DSP-spe- cific applications. Some of these features are discussed briefly below; see the appropriate chapters later in this manual for more information. The Assembler supports the use of arbitrary algebraic expressions as arguments to vari- ous directives and as immediate operands in certain instructions. Terms of these expres- sions may consist of the Assembler’s own built-in functions, which perform data conversion, comparison, and computational operations. In the digital signal processing domain transcendental functions for computing sine, cosine, and natural logarithm are
1-10 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Motorola DSP Assembler Assembler Support For Digital Signal Processing useful for initializing data values in memory, such as sine/cosine tables for FFT algo- rithms. Also, there are functions for easily converting values expressed in decimal floating point to their binary or fractional equivalents. This conversion is done automatically for im- mediate instruction operands and arguments to the DC directive (see Chapter 6). See Chapter 3 for more information on Assembler expressions, operators, and built-in func- tions. The register set of the Motorola digital signal processors allows for efficient use of modulo and reverse-carry buffers for FFT applications. The Assembler supports this architecture by providing several special-purpose directives for allocating circular buffers. The BADDR, BUFFER, DSM, and DSR directives automatically advance the program counter to the next appropriate base address given the buffer size, and perform various boundary and magnitude checks to insure that the buffer is valid. The BSM and BSR provide for automatic alignment and block initialization of DSP buffers. Since a buffer allocated in this fashion can cause alignment gaps in memory, the MU option (see the OPT directive, Chapter 6) may be used to generate a full memory utilization report. See Chapter 6 for more information on Assembler directives and options.
MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL 1-11
Chapter 2 WRITING ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE PROGRAMS
2.1 INPUT FILE FORMAT Programs written in assembly language consist of a sequence of source statements. Any source statement can be extended to one or more lines by including the line continuation character (\) as the last character on the line to be continued. A source statement (first line and any continuation lines) can be a maximum of 512 characters long. Upper and lower case letters are considered equivalent for Assembler mnemonics and directives, but are considered distinct for labels, symbols, directive arguments, and literal strings. If the source file contains horizontal tabs (ASCII $09), the Assembler will expand these to the next fixed tab stop located at eight character intervals (column 1, 9, 17...), unless reset using the TAB directive (see Chapter 6). This is only significant if tab characters are em- bedded within literal strings. For more information on source input file format, see Appendix G, Host-dependent Infor- mation.
2.2 SYMBOL NAMES Symbol names can be from one to 512 characters long. The first character of a symbol must be alphabetic (upper or lower case); any remaining characters can be either alpha- numeric (A-Z, a-z, 0-9) or the underscore character (_). Upper and lower case letters in symbols are considered distinct unless the IC option is in effect (see the OPT directive, Chapter 6). Valid: loop_1 Invalid: 1_loop ENTRY loop.e a_B_c
Certain identifiers are reserved by the Assembler and cannot be used. These identifiers are the upper or lower case name of any Motorola DSP processor register. See Appendix F for a list of the register names of the appropriate target processor.
MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL 2-1 Writing Assembly Language Programs Strings 2.3 STRINGS One or more ASCII characters enclosed by single quotes (') constitute a literal ASCII string. In order to specify an apostrophe within a literal string, two consecutive apostro- phes must appear where the single apostrophe is intended. Strings are used as operands for some Assembler directives and also can be used to a limited extent in expressions. A string may also be enclosed in double quotes (") in which case any DEFINE directive symbols contained in the string would be expanded. The double quote should be used with care inside macros since it is used as a dummy argument string operator (see Chap- ter 5). In that case the macro concatenation operator can be used to escape the double- quoted string if desired. Two strings separated by the string concatenation operator (++) will be recognized by the Assembler as equivalent to the concatenation of the two strings. For example, these two strings are equivalent: 'ABC'++'DEF' = 'ABCDEF'
The Assembler has a substring extraction capability using the square brackets ([ ]). Here is an example: ['DSP56000',3,5] = '56000'
Substrings may be used wherever strings are valid and can be nested. There are also functions for determining the length of a string and the position of one string within anoth- er. See Chapter 3 for more information on string functions.
2.4 SOURCE STATEMENT FORMAT Each source statement may include up to six fields (eight for the DSP96000) separated by one or more spaces or tabs: a label field, an operation field, an operand field, an addi- tional opcode and operand field for the DSP96000, up to two data transfer fields, and a comment field. Only fields preceding the comment field are considered significant to the
2-2 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Writing Assembly Language Programs Source Statement Format Assembler; the comment field is ignored. For example, the following source statement shows all eight possible fields for the DSP96000:
ENT FMPY D8,D6,D2 FADD.S D3,D0 X:(R0),D4.S D2.S,Y:(R5)+ ;TEXT
Comment Y field X field Operand 2 Opcode 2 Operand Opcode Label In general, the contents of each field other than the comment field cannot contain embed- ded whitespace characters, since these characters are used as field delimiters. Two ex- ceptions are blanks and tabs in quoted strings and the syntax of structured control statements (see Chapter 7).
2.4.1 Label Field The label field occurs as the first field of a source statement, and can take one of the fol- lowing forms: 1. A space or tab as the first character on a line ordinarily indicates that the label field is empty, and that the line has no label. 2. An alphabetic character as the first character indicates that the line contains a symbol called a label. 3. An underscore (_) as the first character indicates that the label is a local label. Labels may be indented if the label symbol is immediately followed by a colon (:). If the first non-blank field on a line complies with either forms 2 or 3 above and the field ends with a colon, the Assembler regards this as the label field, even if it does not start with the first character on the line. However, all characters preceding the label on the source line must be whitespace characters (spaces or tab characters). There should be no interven- ing blanks or tabs between the end of the label symbol and the appended colon character. Local labels are any normal symbol name preceded (with no intervening blanks) by an underscore (_). Except for the special case of macros (described below), local labels have a limited scope bounded by any two non-local labels. The local label can be referred to or defined only in source statements that are between two source lines containing non- local labels. Local labels are useful in defining program locations where a unique label name is required but is not considered useful in documenting the source file (for example,
MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL 2-3 Writing Assembly Language Programs Source Statement Format the terminating address of a DO loop). Note that the maximum length of a local label in- cludes the leading underscore (_) character. Use of local labels in macros represents a special case. All local labels within a macro are considered distinct for the currently active level of macro expansion (unless the macro lo- cal label override operator is used; see Chapter 5). These local labels are valid for the en- tire macro expansion and are not considered bounded by non-local labels. Therefore, all local labels within a macro must be unique. This mechanism allows the programmer to freely use local labels within a macro definition without regard to the number of times that the macro is expanded. Non-local labels within a macro expansion are considered to be normal labels and therefore cannot occur more than once unless used with the SET di- rective (see Chapter 6). A label may occur only once in the label field of an individual source file unless it is used as a local label, a label local to a section, or is used with the SET directive. If a non-local label does occur more than once in a label field, each reference to that label after the first will be flagged as an error. A line consisting of a label only is a valid line and has the effect of assigning the value of the location counter to the label. With the exception of some directives, a label is assigned the value of the location counter of the first word of the instruction or data being assem- bled.
2.4.2 Operation Field The operation field appears after the label field, and must be preceded by at least one space or tab. Entries in the operation field may be one of three types: Opcode - Mnemonics that correspond directly to DSP machine instructions. Directive - Special operation codes known to the Assembler which control the assembly process. Macro call - Invocation of a previously defined macro which is to be inserted in place of the macro call. The Assembler first searches for operation codes in an internal macro definition table. If no match is found, the table of machine operation codes and Assembler directives is searched. If neither of the tables holds the specified operation code, an error message is generated (this sequence can be altered with the MACLIB directive). Macro names can therefore replace standard machine operation codes and Assembler directives, although a warning will be issued if such a replacement occurs. The warning can be avoided by use of the RDIRECT directive. See Chapter 6 for more information on the MACLIB and RDI- RECT directives.
2-4 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Writing Assembly Language Programs Source Statement Format 2.4.3 Operand Field The interpretation of the operand field is dependent on the contents of the operation field. The operand field, if present, must follow the operation field, and must be preceded by at least one space or tab. The operand field may contain a symbol, an expression, or a com- bination of symbols and expressions separated by commas. There should be no inter- vening whitespace characters separating operand elements.
The operand field of machine instructions is used to specify the addressing mode of the instruction, as well as the operand of the instruction. The format of the operand field for a particular instruction is given in Appendix A of the User Manual for the DSP in question (.e.g. DSP56000/DSP56001 User’s Manual). The operand fields of Assembler directives are described in Chapter 6. The operand fields of macros (Chapter 5) depend on the def- inition of the macro.
2.4.4 Operation 2 Field DSP96000 only. The second operation field occurs after the first operand field, and only in conjunction with an FMPY instruction. The field must be preceded by at least one space or tab. The second operation field may consist only of the instructions FADD, FSUB, and FADDSUB.
2.4.5 Operand 2 Field DSP96000 only. The interpretation of the second operand field is dependent on the con- tents of the second operation field. The second operand field, if present, must follow the second operation field, and must be preceded by at least one space or tab. The operand field may contain only those register combinations appropriate to the second operation field. The operand field of machine instructions is used to specify the addressing mode of the instruction, as well as the operand of the instruction. The format of the operand field for each DSP96000 instruction is described in Appendix A of the DSP96002 User’s Manual.
2.4.6 Data Transfer Fields Most opcodes can specify one or more data transfers to occur during the execution of the instruction. These data transfers are indicated by two addressing mode operands sepa- rated by a comma, with no embedded blanks. If two data transfers are specified, they must be separated by one or more blanks or tabs. See the appropriate DSP User’s Man- ual for a complete discussion of addressing modes that are applicable to data transfer specifications.
MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL 2-5 Writing Assembly Language Programs Assembler Output 2.4.7 Comment Field Comments are not considered significant to the Assembler, but can be included in the source file for documentation purposes. A comment field is composed of any characters (not part of a literal string) that are preceded by a semicolon (;). A comment starting in the first column of the source file will be aligned with the label field in the listing file. Otherwise, the comment will be shifted right and aligned with the comment field in the listing file, un- less the NOPP option is used (see the OPT directive, Chapter 6). Comments preceded by two consecutive semicolons (;;) will not be reproduced on the Assembler listing and will not be saved as part of a macro definition.
2.5 ASSEMBLER OUTPUT The Assembler output consists of an optional listing of the source program and an optional object file. Appendix D contains the description of the source listing format and Appendix E contains the description of the object file format. The assembly source program listing contains the original source statements, formatted for easier reading, as well as additional information which is generated by the Assembler. Most lines in the listing correspond directly to a source statement. Lines which do not cor- respond directly to source statements include page headings, error messages, and ex- pansions of macro calls or directives such as DC (Define Constant; see Chapter 6). The assembly listing optionally may contain a symbol table or a cross-reference table of all non-local symbols appearing in the program. These are always printed after the end of source input or the END directive (whichever occurs first) if either the symbol table or cross-reference table options are in effect (see the OPT directive, Chapter 6). The symbol table contains the name of each symbol, along with its defined value. The cross-reference table additionally contains the Assembler-maintained source line number of every refer- ence to every non-local symbol (local symbols may be included in the cross-reference list- ing by using the LOC option; see the OPT directive, Chapter 6). The format of the cross- reference table is shown in Appendix D. If the MU option is enabled (see the OPT directive, Chapter 6), the Assembler generates a report of load and runtime memory utilization. The report shows beginning and ending addresses of allocated memory areas, along with their lengths and associated symbol names, if applicable. A separate report is generated for each memory space where data has been reserved for use by the program. The format of the report is given in Appendix D. The Assembler object file is a binary COFF (Common Object File Format) file, with exten- sions and adaptations to support symbolic debugging and to make DSP object files trans- portable among host platforms. COFF is a formal definition for the structure of machine code files. It is derived from AT&T UNIX System V and represents a quasi-de facto stan- dard for object file formats. Refer to Appendix E for more information on Motorola DSP COFF structure and layout.
2-6 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Chapter 3 EXPRESSIONS
3.1 INTRODUCTION An expression represents a value which is used as an operand in an Assembler instruc- tion or directive. An expression is a combination of symbols, constants, operators, and parentheses. Expressions may contain user-defined labels and their associated integer or floating point values, and/or any combination of integers, floating point numbers, or ASCII literal strings. In general, white space (a blank or tab) is not allowed between the terms and operators of an Assembler expression. Expressions otherwise follow the con- ventional rules of algebra and boolean arithmetic.
3.2 ABSOLUTE AND RELATIVE EXPRESSIONS An expression may be either relative or absolute. An absolute expression is one which consists only of absolute terms, or is the result of two relative terms with opposing signs. A relative expression consists of a relative term by itself or only in combination with abso- lute terms. When the Assembler is operating in relative mode all address expressions must adhere to the above definitions for absolute or relative expressions. This is because only these types of expressions will retain a meaningful value after program relocation. For example, when relative terms are paired with opposing signs, the result is the difference between the two relative terms, which is an absolute value. However, if two positive relative terms are added together the result is unpredictable based on the computed values of the terms at relocation time.
3.3 EXPRESSION MEMORY SPACE ATTRIBUTE A symbol is associated with either an integer or a floating point value which is used in place of the symbol during the expression evaluation. Each symbol also carries a memory space attribute of either X, Y, L, Program, EMI, or None. Constants and floating point ex- pressions always have a memory space attribute of None. The result of an expression will always have a memory space attribute associated with it. The unary logical negate oper- ator, relational operators, and some functions return values that have a memory space at- tribute of N. The result of an expression that has only one operand (and possibly the unary negate or unary minus operator) always has the memory attribute of that operand. Ex-
MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL 3-1 Expressions Expression Memory Space Attribute pressions that involve two or more operands and operators other than those mentioned above derive the memory space attribute of the result by examining the operands on the left and right side of an operator as shown in the following chart: Left Operand Memory Space Attribute
XYLPEN
Right Operand X X* X* *X Memory Space Attribute Y * YY* *Y
LXYL* *L
P***P*P
E****EE
NXYLPEN * = Represents an illegal operation that will result in an error. Notice that L memory space is regarded as a union of both X and Y space. In expressions that have one element that has a memory space attribute of L and another element with a memory space attribute of either X or Y, the result will have the more restrictive memory space attribute (X or Y). The memory space attribute is regarded by the Assembler as a type, in the same sense that high level languages use type for variables. Symbols that are assigned memory space attributes of X, Y, L, P, or E are assumed to be addresses and therefore can only have values between zero and the maximum address of the target processor. Only sym- bols that have a memory space attribute of N can have values greater than the maximum address of the target machine.
Memory space attributes become important when an expression is used as an address. Errors will occur when the memory space attribute of the expression result does not match the explicit or implicit memory space specified in the source code. Memory spaces are explicit when the address has any of the following forms: X:
Y: L: P: E:The memory space is implicitly P when an address is used as the operand of a DO, branch, or jump-type instruction.
3-2 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Expressions Internal Expression Representation Expressions used for immediate addressing can have any memory space attribute.
3.4 INTERNAL EXPRESSION REPRESENTATION Expression value representation internal to the Assembler is dependent on the word size of the target processor. The Assembler supports a word and a double word integer format internally. The actual storage size of an expression value is dependent upon the magni- tude of the result, but the Assembler is capable of representing signed integers up to 64 bits in length. These longer integer representations are useful when performing data ini- tialization in L memory space. Internal floating point representation is almost entirely dependent upon the host environ- ment, but in general floating point values are stored in double precision format. This means that there are ordinarily 64 bits of storage allotted for a floating point number by the Assembler, with 11 bits of exponent, 53 bits of mantissa, and an implied binary point.
3.5 CONSTANTS Constants represent quantities of data that do not vary in value during the execution of a program.
3.5.1 Numeric Constants Numeric constants can be in one of three bases: Binary Binary constants consist of a percent sign (%) followed by a string of binary digits (0,1). Example: %11010 Hexadecimal Hexadecimal constants consist of a dollar sign ($) followed by a string of hexadecimal digits (0-9, A-F, a-f). Example: $12FF, $12ff
Decimal Decimal constants can be either floating point or integer. Integer decimal constants consist of a string of decimal (0-9) digits op- tionally preceded by a grave accent (`). Floating point constants are indicated either by a preceding, following, or included decimal point or by the presence of an upper or lower case ‘E’ followed by the exponent. Example: 12345 (integer) 6E10 (floating point)
MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL 3-3 Expressions Operators .6 (floating point) 2.7e2 (floating point)
A constant may be written without a leading radix indicator if the input radix is changed using the RADIX directive. For example, a hexadecimal constant may be written without the leading dollar sign ($) if the input radix is set to16 (assuming an initial radix of 10). The default radix is10. See Chapter 6 on the RADIX directive for more information.
3.5.2 String Constants String constants that are used in expressions are converted to a concatenated sequence of ASCII bytes (right aligned), as shown below. Strings used in expressions are limited to the long word size of the target processor; subsequent characters in the string are ig- nored. Null strings (strings that have no characters) have a value of 0. String constants greater than the maximum number of characters can be used in expres- sions, but the Assembler will truncate the value and will use only those characters that will fit in a DSP long word. In this case, a warning will be printed. This restriction also applies to string constants using the string concatenation operator. Handling of string constants by the DC and DCB directives is an exception to this rule; see Chapter 6 for a description. Examples: 'ABCD' ($41424344) '''79' ($00273739) 'A' ($00000041) '' ($00000000) - null string 'abcdef' ($61626364) 'abc'++'de' ($61626364)
3.6 OPERATORS Some of the Assembler operators can be used with both floating point and integer values. If one of the operands of the operator has a floating point value and the other has an in- teger value, the integer will be converted to a floating point value before the operator is applied and the result will be floating point. If both operands of the operator are integers, the result will be an integer value. Similarly, if both the operands are floating point, the result will be a floating point value.
3.6.1 Unary operators plus (+) minus (-) one’s complement (~) - Integer only logical negate (!)
3-4 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Expressions Operators The unary plus operator returns the value of its operand. The unary minus operator returns the negative of its operand. The one’s complement operator returns the one’s complement of its operand. It cannot be used with a floating point operand. The unary logical negation operator returns an integer 1 (memory space attribute None) if the value of its operand is 0 and will return a 0 otherwise. For example, if the symbol BUF had a value of 0, then !BUF would have a value of 1. If BUF had a value of 1000, !BUF would have a value of 0.
3.6.2 Arithmetic operators addition (+) subtraction (-) multiplication (*) division (/) mod (%)
The addition operator yields the sum of its operands. The subtraction operator yields the difference of its operands. The multiplication operator yields the product of its operands. The divide operator yields the quotient of the division of the first operand by the second. For integer operands the divide operation will produce a truncated integer result. The mod operator applied to integers will yield the remainder from the division of the first operand by the second. If the mod operator is used with floating point operands, the mod operator will apply the following rules: Y % Z = Y if Z = 0 = X if Z <> 0 where X has the same sign as Y, is less than Z, and satisfies the relationship: Y = i * Z + X where i is an integer.
3.6.3 Shift operators shift left (<<) - Integer only shift right (>>) - Integer only
MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL 3-5 Expressions Operators The shift left operator causes the left operand to be shifted to the left (and zero-filled) by the number of bits specified by the right operand. The shift right operator causes the left operand to be shifted to the right by the number of bits specified by the right operand. The sign bit will be extended. Shift operators cannot be applied to floating point operands.
3.6.4 Relational operators less than (<) less than or equal (<=) greater than (>) greater than or equal (>=) equal (==) not equal (!=)
Relational operators all work the same way. If the indicated condition is true, the result of the expression is an integer 1. If it is false, the result of the expression is an integer 0. In either case, the memory space attribute of the result is None. For example, if D has a value of 3 and E has a value of 5, then the result of the expression D
3.6.5 Bitwise operators AND (&) - Integer only OR (|) - Integer only exclusive OR (^) - Integer only
The bitwise AND operator yields the bitwise AND function of its operands. The bitwise OR operator yields the bitwise OR function of its operands. The bitwise exclusive OR operator yields the bitwise exclusive OR function of its oper- ands. Bitwise operators cannot be applied to floating point operands.
3-6 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Expressions Operator Precedence 3.6.6 Logical operators Logical AND (&&) Logical OR (||)
The logical AND operator returns an integer 1 if both of its operands are nonzero; other- wise, it returns an integer 0. The logical OR operator returns an integer 1 if either of its operands is nonzero; otherwise it returns an integer 0. The types of the operands may be either integer or floating point; the memory space at- tribute of the result is None. Logical operators are primarily intended for use with the con- ditional assembly IF directive, but can be used in any expression.
3.7 OPERATOR PRECEDENCE Expressions are evaluated with the following operator precedence: 1. parenthetical expression (innermost first) 2. unary plus, unary minus, one’s complement, logical negation 3. multiplication, division, mod 4. addition, subtraction 5. shift 6. relational operators: less, less or equal, greater, greater or equal 7. relational operators: equal, not equal 8. bitwise AND, OR, EOR 9. logical AND, OR
Operators of the same precedence are evaluated left to right. Valid operands include nu- meric constants, literal ASCII strings, and symbols. The one’s complement, shift, and bit- wise operators cannot be applied to floating point operands. That is, if the evaluation of an expression (after operator precedence has been applied) results in a floating point number on either side of any of these operators, an error will be generated.
3.8 FUNCTIONS The Assembler has several built-in functions to support data conversion, string compari- son, and transcendental math computations. Functions may be used as terms in any ar- bitrary expression. Functions may have zero or more arguments, but must always be followed by open and closed parentheses. Function arguments which are expressions must be absolute expressions except where noted. Arguments containing external refer- ences are not allowed. There must be no intervening spaces between the function name
MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL 3-7 Expressions Functions and the opening parenthesis, and there must be no spaces between comma-separated arguments. Assembler functions can be grouped into five types: 1. Mathematical functions 2. Conversion functions 3. String functions 4. Macro functions 5. Assembler mode functions
3.8.1 Mathematical Functions The mathematical functions comprise transcendental, random value, and min/max func- tions, among others: ABS - Absolute value ACS - Arc cosine ASN - Arc sine AT2 - Arc tangent ATN - Arc tangent CEL - Ceiling function COH - Hyperbolic cosine COS - Cosine FLR - Floor function L10 - Log base 10 LOG - Natural logarithm MAX - Maximum value MIN - Minimum value POW - Raise to a power RND - Random value SGN - Return sign SIN - Sine SNH - Hyperbolic sine SQT - Square root TAN - Tangent TNH - Hyperbolic tangent XPN - Exponential function
3-8 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Expressions Functions 3.8.2 Conversion Functions The conversion functions provide conversion between integer, floating point, and fixed point fractional values: CVF - Convert integer to floating point CVI - Convert floating point to integer CVS - Convert memory space FLD - Shift and mask operation FRC - Convert floating point to fractional LFR - Convert floating point to long fractional LNG - Concatenate to double word LUN - Convert long fractional to floating point RVB - Reverse bits in field UNF - Convert fractional to floating point
3.8.3 String Functions String functions compare strings, return the length of a string, and return the position of a substring within a string: LEN - Length of string POS - Position of substring in string SCP - Compare strings
3.8.4 Macro Functions Macro functions return information about macros: ARG - Macro argument function CNT - Macro argument count MAC - Macro definition function MXP - Macro expansion function
MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL 3-9 Expressions Functions 3.8.5 Assembler Mode Functions Miscellaneous functions having to do with Assembler operation: CCC - Cumulative cycle count CHK - Current instruction/data checksum CTR - Location counter type DEF - Symbol definition function EXP - Expression check INT - Integer check LCV - Location counter value LST - LIST directive flag value MSP - Memory space REL - Relative mode function
Individual descriptions of each of the Assembler functions follow. They include usage guidelines, functional descriptions, and examples. @ABS(
@ACS(
ACOS = @ACS(-1.0) ; ACOS = 3.141593
@ARG(
3-10 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Expressions Functions @ASN(
@AT2(
@ATN(
@CCC() Returns the cumulative cycle count as an integer. Useful in conjunction with the CC, NOCC, and CONTCC Assembler options (see the OPT directive). The mem- ory space attribute of the result will be None. Example:
IF @CCC() > 200 ; cycle count > 200?
@CEL(
MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL 3-11 Expressions Functions @CHK() Returns the current instruction/data checksum value as an integer. Useful in con- junction with the CK, NOCK, and CONTCK Assembler options (see the OPT direc- tive). Note that assignment of the checksum value with directives other than SET could cause phasing errors due to different generated instruction values between passes. The memory space attribute of the result will be None. Example: CHKSUM SET @CHK() ; reserve checksum value
@CNT() Returns the count of the current macro expansion arguments as an integer. A warning will be issued if this function is used when no macro expansion is active. The memory space attribute of the result will be None. Example: ARGCNT SET @CNT() ; squirrel away arg count
@COH(
@COS(
Example: DC -@COS(@CVF(COUNT)*FREQ) ; compute cosine value
@CTR({L | R}) If L is specified as the argument, returns the counter number of the load location counter. If R is specified, returns the counter number of the runtime location counter. The counter number is returned as an integer value with memory space of None. Example: CNUM = @CTR(R) ; runtime counter number
3-12 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Expressions Functions @CVF(
@CVI(
@CVS({X | Y | L | P | E | N},
@DEF(
Example: IF @DEF(ANGLE) ; assemble if ANGLE defined
@EXP(
MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL 3-13 Expressions Functions @FLD(
@FLR(
@FRC(
@INT(
Example: IF @INT(TERM) ; insure integer value
@L10(
3-14 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Expressions Functions @LCV({L | R}[,{L | H |
@LEN(
@LFR(
MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL 3-15 Expressions Functions @LNG(
@LOG(
@LST() Returns the value of the LIST directive flag as an integer, with a memory space at- tribute of None. Whenever a LIST directive is encountered in the Assembler source, the flag is incremented; when a NOLIST directive is encountered, the flag is decremented. Example: DUP @CVI(@ABS(@LST())) ; list unconditionally
@LUN(
@MAC(
3-16 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Expressions Functions @MAX(
@MIN(
@MSP(
The
@MXP()
Returns an integer 1 (memory space attribute N) if the Assembler is expanding a macro, 0 otherwise. Example: IF @MXP() ; macro expansion active?
@POS(
MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL 3-17 Expressions Functions
@POW(
@REL() Returns an integer 1 (memory space attribute N) if the Assembler is operating in relative mode, 0 otherwise. Example: IF @REL() ; in relative mode?
@RND() Returns a random value in the range 0.0 to 1.0. The memory space attribute of the result will be None. Example: SEED DC @RND() ; save initial seed value
@RVB(
Reverse the bits in
3-18 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Expressions Functions @SCP(
@SGN(
@SIN(
@SNH(
@SQT(
MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL 3-19 Expressions Functions @TAN(
@TNH(
@UNF(
@XPN(
3-20 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Chapter 4 SOFTWARE PROJECT MANAGEMENT
4.1 INTRODUCTION The Motorola DSP Assemblers provide several directives designed to assist in the devel- opment of large software projects. Complex software projects often are divided into small- er program units. These subprograms may be written by a team of programmers in parallel, or they may be programs written for a previous development effort that are going to be reused. The Assembler provides directives to encapsulate program units and permit the free use of symbol names within subprograms without regard to symbol names used in other programs. These encapsulated program units are called sections. Sections are also the basis for relocating blocks of code and data, so that concerns about memory placement are postponed until after the assembly process.
4.2 SECTIONS A section is bounded by a SECTION directive and an ENDSEC directive. For example: SECTION
MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL 4-1 Software Project Management Sections And Data Hiding 4.3 SECTIONS AND DATA HIDING Symbols within a section are generally distinct from other symbols used elsewhere in the source program, even if the symbol name is the same. This is true as long as the section name associated with each symbol is unique, the symbol is not declared public (XDEF or GLOBAL), and the GLOBAL or LOCAL qualifiers are not used in the section declaration (see below). Symbols that are defined outside of a section are considered global symbols and have no explicit section name associated with them. Global symbols may be refer- enced freely from inside or outside of any section, as long as the global symbol name does not conflict with another symbol by the same name in a given section. Consider the fol- lowing example: SYM1 EQU 1 SYM2 EQU 2
SECTION EXAMPLE
SYM1 EQU 3
MOVE #SYM1,R0 MOVE #SYM2,R1
ENDSEC
MOVE #SYM1,R2
SYM1 and SYM2 are global symbols, initially defined outside of any section. Then in sec- tion EXAMPLE another instance of SYM1 is defined with a different value. Because SYM1 was redefined inside the section, the value moved to R0 will be 3. Since SYM2 is a global symbol the value moved to R1 will be 2. The last move to R2 is outside of any section and thus the global instance of SYM1 is used; the value moved to R2 is 1.
4.3.1 Sections and Symbols Symbols may be shared among sections through use of the XDEF and XREF directives. The XDEF directive instructs the Assembler that certain symbol definitions that occur within the current section are to be accessible by other sections: XDEF
The XREF directive instructs the Assembler that all references to
4-2 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Software Project Management Sections And Data Hiding XDEFed symbols by default are recognized only in other sections which XREF them. They can be made fully global (recognizable by sections which do not XREF them) by use of the XR option (see the OPT directive, Chapter 6). Alternatively the GLOBAL directive (see Chapter 6) may be used within a section to make the named symbols visible outside of the section. Both the XDEF and XREF directives must be used before the symbols to which they refer are defined or used in the section. Here is another example: SYM1 EQU 1 SECTION SECT1 XDEF SYM2 SYM1 EQU 2 SYM2 EQU 3 ENDSEC SECTION SECT2 XREF SYM2 MOVE #SYM1,R0 MOVE #SYM2,R1 ENDSEC MOVE #SYM2,R2
SYM1 is first defined outside of any section. Then in section SECT1 SYM2 is declared public with an XDEF directive. SYM1 is also defined locally to section SECT1. In section SECT2 SYM2 is declared external via the XREF directive, followed by a move of SYM1 to R0. Since SYM1 was defined locally to section SECT1, the Assembler uses the global value and moves a 1 to R0. Because SYM2 was declared external in section SECT1 the value moved to R1 is 3. If SYM2 had not been XREFed in section SECT2 the value moved to R1 would have been unknown at this point. In the last instruction it is not known what value will be moved to R2 since SYM2 was not defined outside of any section or was not declared GLOBAL within a section. If the GLOBAL qualifier follows the
MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL 4-3 Software Project Management Sections And Data Hiding 4.3.2 Sections and Macros The division of a program into sections controls not only labels and symbols, but also mac- ros and DEFINE directive symbols. Macros defined within a section are private to that section and are distinct from macros defined in other sections even if they have the same macro name. Macros defined outside of sections are considered global and may be used within any section. Similarly, DEFINE directive symbols defined within a section are pri- vate to that section and DEFINE directive symbols defined outside of any section are glo- bally applied. There are no directives that correspond to XDEF for macros or DEFINE symbols, therefore macros and DEFINE symbols defined in a section can never be ac- cessed globally. If global accessibility is desired, the macros and DEFINE symbols should be defined outside of any section. Here is an example: DEFINE DEFVAL '1' SECTION SECT1 DEFINE DEFVAL '2' MOVE #DEFVAL,R0 ENDSEC MOVE #DEFVAL,R1
The second definition of DEFVAL is visible only inside SECT1, so the value moved to R0 will be 2. However, the second move instruction is outside the scope of SECT1 and will therefore use the initial definition of DEFVAL. This means that the value 1 will be moved to R1.
4.3.3 Nested and Fragmented Sections Sections can be nested to any level. When the Assembler encounters a nested section, the current section is stacked and the new section is used. When the ENDSEC directive of the nested section is encountered, the Assembler restores the old section and uses it. The ENDSEC directive always applies to the most recent SECTION directive. Nesting sections provides a measure of scoping for symbol names, in that symbols defined within a given section are visible to other sections nested within it. For example, if section B is nested inside section A, then a symbol defined in section A can be used in section B with- out XDEFing in section A or XREFing in section B. This scoping behavior can be turned off and on with the NONS and NS options respectively (see the OPT directive, Chapter 6). Sections may also be split into separate parts. That is,
4-4 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Software Project Management Sections And Relocation 4.4 SECTIONS AND RELOCATION When the Assembler operates in relative mode (the default), sections act as the basic grouping for relocation of code and data blocks. For every section defined in the source a set of location counters is allocated for each DSP memory space. These counters are used to maintain offsets of data and instructions relative to the beginning of the section. At link time sections can be relocated to an absolute address, loaded in a particular order, or linked contiguously as specified by the programmer. Sections which are split into parts or among files are logically recombined so that each section can be relocated as a unit. Sections may be relocatable or absolute. In the Assembler absolute mode (command line -A option) all sections are considered absolute. In relative mode, all sections are initially relocatable. However, a section or a part of a section may be made absolute either im- plicitly by using the ORG directive, or explicitly through use of the MODE directive. If the Assembler encounters an ORG directive with an absolute runtime address specifi- cation it switches to absolute mode and begins generating absolute addresses within the enclosing section. Note that the mode change is effective only if the Assembler was start- ed in relative mode; if the -A command line option is used the Assembler always gener- ates absolute addresses. The Assembler continues to generate absolute code until an ENDSEC directive is encountered, or the mode is explicitly changed via the MODE direc- tive. The MODE directive allows for arbitrary switching between absolute and relocatable code generation: MODE
The MODE directive may be issued at any time in the assembly source to alter the set of location counters used for section addressing. Code generated while in absolute mode will be placed in memory at the location determined during assembly. Relocatable code and data within a section are combined at link time, even if absolute blocks are inter-
MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL 4-5 Software Project Management Address Assignment spersed among relocatable blocks. The MODE directive has no effect when the com- mand line -A option is active. The following is an example: SECTION EXAMPLE ; relocatable section
; code/data generated here is relocatable
MODE ABSOLUTE
; code/data generated here is absolute; it will be ; placed in memory at the location specified during ; assembly
MODE REL
; back to relocatable; code/data generated here ; will be combined with the previous relocatable block, ; as long as memory space and mappings are compatible
ORG P:$200
; code/data generated here will be absolute ; until ENDSEC directive is found
ENDSEC
More information on the ORG and MODE directives can be found in Address Assignment and under the individual directive descriptions in Chapter 6. If the STATIC qualifier follows the
4.5 ADDRESS ASSIGNMENT The Motorola DSP Assembler can support absolute address assignment at assembly time or generation of relocatable program addresses which are resolved during the linking phase. The ORG directive is used to specify memory space changes, mappings to phys- ical memory, and absolute address assignment. Various memory layouts require special handling for data generation or location counter updating. In the case of L memory, two words of code or data are produced for each in-
4-6 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Software Project Management Address Assignment crement of the location counter. There are many kinds of E memory depending on the characteristics of the RAM devices used. In most cases E memory implies splitting the generated word into 8-bit triplets or 8 and 16-bit pairs on output, and adjusting the location counter appropriately. The Assembler allows for two sets of program counters per memory space, a set of load counters and a set of runtime counters. The distinction between load and runtime counters is maintained so that the Assembler can support overlays, or runtime transfers of code/data from one memory space to another. In these cases code or data might be loaded in one memory space at a given address, but then copied to a different memory space and address for execution. The Assembler can produce output for either absolute or relocatable overlays. Motorola DSPs are capable of performing special-purpose addressing on data structures suited to digital signal processing applications. Two such data structures are the modulo buffer and the reverse-carry buffer, collectively referred to as circular buffers. Due to the way they are accessed and manipulated, these buffers generally are constrained to a par- ticular size or starting address. The Assembler provides directives for aligning buffer base addresses, allocating buffer space, and initializing buffer contents.
4.5.1 The ORG Directive The ORG directive specifies which memory space will be the runtime memory space and which counter (the H, L, default, or numbered runtime counter associated with that mem- ory space and section) will be the runtime location counter. At the same time, the ORG directive indicates which memory space will be the load memory space and which counter (the H, L, default, or numbered load counter associated with that memory space and sec- tion) will be used as the load location counter. In addition, the ORG directive can be used to specify a physical mapping to DSP memory and to assign initial values to the runtime and load location counters. The names of the counters (High, Low, and default) are symbolic only, and the Assembler performs no checks to insure that the value assigned to the High counter is greater than the Low. Moreover, there is no inherent relationship among numbered counters, except that counters 0, 1, and 2 correspond to the default, Low, and High counters, respectively. Counters are useful for providing mnemonic links between runtime and load memory spaces or among individual memory blocks. Separate counters can be used to obtain blocks within a common section which are accessed from one memory space but mapped to separate physical memories. Also counters are necessary for handling relocatable overlays at link time, as the DSP linker does not support the notion of separate load and runtime counters. See the examples below for more information on location counter us- age. The ORG directive is organized as follows: ORG
MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL 4-7 Software Project Management Address Assignment or alternatively: ORG
4-8 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Software Project Management Address Assignment
4.5.2 Overlays If the last half of the operand field in an ORG directive dealing with the load memory space and counter is not specified, then the Assembler will assume that the load memory space and load location counter are the same as the runtime memory space and runtime loca- tion counter. In this case, object code is being assembled to be loaded into the address and memory space where it will be when the program is run, and is not an overlay. If the load memory space and counter are given in the operand field, then the Assembler always generates code for an overlay. Whether the overlay is absolute or relocatable de- pends upon the current operating mode of the Assembler and whether the load counter value is an absolute or relative expression. If the Assembler is running in absolute mode, or if the load counter expression is absolute, then the overlay is absolute. If the Assembler
MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL 4-9 Software Project Management Address Assignment is in relative mode and the load counter expression is relative, the overlay is relocatable. Runtime relocatable overlay code is addressed relative to the location given in the runtime location counter expression. This expression, if relative, may not refer to another overlay block. See section 1.7 for more information on location counters and overlays. The values and memory space attributes of both the load and runtime location counters can be accessed with the @LCV function (see Section 3.8). This is particularly useful when assigning the load location counter value to a label as a reference point for the over- lay manager part of the program. The High, Low, default, or numbered counter assign- ment can be determined by using the @CTR function (Section 3.8).
4.5.3 Address Assignment Examples Some examples of the ORG directive are as follows: ORG P:$1000 Sets the runtime memory space to P. Selects the default runtime counter (counter 0) associated with P space to use as the runtime location counter and initializes it to $1000. The load memory space is implied to be P, and the load location counter is assumed to be the same as the runtime location counter. ORG PHE: Sets the runtime memory space to P. Selects the H load counter (counter 2) as- sociated with P space to use as the runtime location counter. The H counter will not be initialized, and its last value will be used. Code generated hereafter will be mapped to external (E) memory. The load memory space is implied to be P, and the load location counter is assumed to be the same as the runtime location counter. ORG PI:OVL1,Y: Indicates code will be generated for an overlay. The runtime memory space is P, and the default counter is used as the runtime location counter. It will be reset to the value of OVL1. If the Assembler is in absolute mode via the -A command line option then OVL1 must be an absolute expression. If OVL1 is an absolute expres- sion the Assembler uses the absolute runtime location counter. If OVL1 is a relo- catable value the Assembler uses the relative runtime location counter. In this case OVL1 must not itself be an overlay symbol (e.g. defined within an overlay block). The load memory space is Y. Since neither H, L, nor any counter expression was specified as the load counter, the default load counter (counter 0) will be used as the load location counter. The counter value and mode will be whatever it was the last time it was referenced.
4-10 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Software Project Management Address Assignment ORG XL:,E8: Sets the runtime memory space to X. Selects the L counter (counter 1) associated with X space to use as the runtime location counter. The L counter will not be ini- tialized, and its last value will be used. The load memory space is set to E, and the qualifier 8 indicates a bytewise RAM configuration. Instructions and data will be generated eight bits per output word with byte-oriented load addresses. The de- fault load counter will be used and there is no explicit load origin. ORG P(5):,Y:$8000 Indicates code will be generated for an absolute overlay. The runtime memory space is P, and the counter used as the runtime location counter is counter 5. It will not be initialized, and the last previous value of counter 5 will be used. The load memory space is Y. Since neither H, L, nor any counter expression was specified as the load counter, the default load counter (counter 0) will be used as the load location counter. The default load counter will be initialized to $8000. If the last example shown was used in the following code sequence (assume the runtime counter associated with P space had a previous value of $0010), ORG P(5):,Y:$8000 RLMUL MOVE X:(R0),D4.S Y:(R4),D7.S FMPY.S D4,D7,D0 MOVE D0.S,X:(R1) then the label RLMUL would have a value of $0010 and a memory space attribute of P space; the code generated would load into Y memory starting at $8000; and the runtime address associated with the code would start at $0010.
4.5.4 Circular Buffers To take advantage of the special DSP addressing capabilities a circular buffer must be aligned on an appropriate address boundary with respect to its size. For a buffer to be located properly in memory the lower bits of the starting address which encompass one less than the buffer size must be zero. For example, the lowest address greater than zero at which a buffer of size 32 may be located is 32 (20 hexadecimal). More generally, the buffer base address must be modulo the buffer size, or a multiple of 2k, where 2k is greater than or equal to the size of the buffer. Buffers may be allocated manually or by using one of the Assembler’s special buffer di- rectives: ORG X:$100 BUF1 DS 24 BUF2 DSM 32
MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL 4-11 Software Project Management Address Assignment The ORG statement sets the origin to hexadecimal 100 in X memory. The first buffer BUF1 is manually allocated with a size of 24. Since the starting address is hex 100 the buffer is already suitably aligned. The label BUF1 is assigned the runtime counter value at the beginning of the buffer. The second buffer is allocated using the DSM directive, which automatically sets the buffer starting address before reserving space. In this case, the first buffer ended at location 117 hexadecimal, so the Assembler advances the pro- gram counter to location 120 hex before assigning a value to the buffer label BUF2. Buffers are special-purpose data structures, but they are named and accessed with labels like any other data block. They therefore adhere to the same rules governing data hiding in sections that any other segment of code or data would follow. A buffer allocated when the Assembler is in absolute mode (either via -A or an absolute ORG or MODE directive) is placed in memory according to the absolute value of the runtime location counter at as- sembly time. A buffer allocated in relative mode (a relocatable buffer) is suitably aligned within its relocation section at assembly time. During the link phase a section enclosing any relocatable buffers is located based on the largest relocatable buffer it contains, un- less the buffers inside the section are auto-aligned. This insures that any smaller buffers within the section are properly aligned. If any buffers in the section are auto-aligned, they will be relocated independent of any other code or data in the section. Note that reposi- tioning of any buffer, whether relocatable or absolute, may result in alignment gaps in memory depending on the layout of data surrounding the buffer blocks.
4-12 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Software Project Management Example 1: Multi-programmer Environment 4.6 EXAMPLE 1: MULTI-PROGRAMMER ENVIRONMENT Typical multi-programmer projects are often split into tasks representing functional units. For discussion purposes, suppose a project has been divided into three tasks - I/O, FILTER, and MAIN. Each task will be written by a separate programmer as a separate section. For example, when the I/O task has been written, there will be a file called IO.ASM. This file will have the following form: SECTION I_O XREF I_PORT,O_PORT ORG XL: . .
In this example, because the X space storage locations were defined within the section I_O, they will be private storage locations that are accessible only by the I_O handler, and cannot be referenced by other sections. If global memory resource management is de- sired, then the I_O section would not have defined any storage locations, and these would have been defined as XREF. The X space data will be addressed through the Low runtime counter. The P memory code is also private to the I_O section and uses the de- fault runtime location counter for address generation.
In the discussion below, assume that the programmers responsible for the FILTER and MAIN sections have similar program structures located in files named FILTER.ASM and MAIN.ASM respectively. The program units can be combined either by invoking a final assembly step to assign absolute addresses, or by assembling the modules separately and then linking.
MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL 4-13 Software Project Management Example 1: Multi-programmer Environment 4.6.1 Absolute Mode Implementation To assemble the entire project source code, a new file called PROJECT.ASM would be created and would have the form: ORG XLE:$0000 .
This file provides the project manager with a mechanism to organize memory utilization to suit the application. For example, the external high P memory initialization statement might correspond to the memory location of an external EPROM. After the location counters corresponding to the X, Y, and P(rogram) memory spaces are initialized, the Assembler is directed to take input from the MAIN.ASM file with the IN- CLUDE directive. Within the MAIN.ASM file, the source statements are assembled and object code is generated. The X, Y, L, and P(rogram) location counters (High, Low) are advanced corresponding to the number of words generated for each memory space and location counter in use. When the end of the MAIN.ASM file is encountered, the Assembler returns to the next se- quential statement in the PROJECT.ASM file. This directs the Assembler to start taking input from the IO.ASM file. Within this file, the ORG PL: statement directs the Assembler
4-14 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Software Project Management Example 1: Multi-programmer Environment to set the current memory space to P(rogram) and restore the last used P(rogram) L(ow) location counter. The
4.6.2 Relative Mode Implementation Using the Assembler default relative mode, each of the source files is assembled sepa- rately. For each section defined in the input files a separate set of location counters is maintained such that all memory spaces for each section begin at relative address zero. The linker is invoked to combine the files and establish base addresses: DSPLNK -B -M -OXLI:0 -OYLI:0 -OYH:FFC0 -OXH:FFC0 \ -OPL:1000 -OPHE:A000 MAIN IO FILTER
The linker reads the command input and sets up base values for all counters specified on the command line. In this example, the X and Y low memory counters are initialized to ze- ro, whereas the X and Y high memory counters are set to FFC0 hexadecimal. The pro- gram low and high memory counters are initialized similarly. When the linker creates the executable file it reads the input files and sets the starting address for all sections relative to the values obtained from the command line. As the MAIN object file is read the linker increments the section counters for all appropriate memory spaces. After the MAIN object file is processed, the IO object file is read. The section named I_O contained an ORG directive indicating a switch to the low X data memory counter. Recall that the Assembler generated relocatable code for the I_O section source such that the low X data memory counter begins at zero. The linker adjusts the low X memory counter associated with section I_O to reflect any previous data generation performed in low X memory (e.g. in MAIN). The FILTER module is linked in a similar fashion. Another way for specifying base addresses, instead of lengthy command line options, is through a memory control file. The memory control file allows the programmer to indi- cate memory space starting addresses analogously to the command line approach. In ad- dition, the memory control file offers finer control over placement of sections in memory. See the Motorola DSP Linker/Librarian Reference Manual for more information on the memory control file. The preceding examples described two methods for organizing a software project. Refer to the descriptions of the ORG and SECTION directives in Chapter 6 for a more detailed discussion. See also the Motorola DSP Linker/Librarian Reference Manual for more in-
MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL 4-15 Software Project Management Example 2: Overlays formation on relocation and linking. One other Assembler directive that should be men- tioned (although not shown in the previous example) is the MACLIB directive which allows sections to share a common macro library. The MACLIB directive is discussed more fully in Chapter 5.
4.7 EXAMPLE 2: OVERLAYS An overlay is a transfer of code or data from one memory space or address to another memory space or address at runtime. Often the transfer involves copying different blocks of code or data over a common storage area as runtime circumstances dictate; hence the name overlay. Overlays are useful for moving code into internal program memory from an external memory source such as EPROM. They are also effective when implementing large programs with multiple segments which do not need to be accessed concurrently. Consider the following program fragment contained in a file called OVER1.ASM: SECTION OVERLAY1 XREF OVLBASE XDEF OVL1,O1SIZE ORG X: OVL1 ORG P:OVLBASE,X: START . .
4-16 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Software Project Management Example 2: Overlays 4.7.1 Absolute Mode Implementation In order to avoid binding addresses within the individual overlay modules, the programmer could devise a preamble file called OVLPROJ.ASM which sets the appropriate counters and establishes the overlay base address. Note that the following code assumes a DSP96000, but similar instructions would apply for other target processors: SECTION OVLPROJECT XDEF OVLBASE XREF OVL1,O1SIZE XREF OVL2,O2SIZE XREF OVL3,O3SIZE ORG XE:$100 ; set absolute base for overlay sections ORG PI:$200 ; set absolute base address for overlay OVLBASE DS $400 ; reserve space for overlay area MOVEOV1 ; code to move first overlay segment MOVE #OVL1,R0; load overlay code address MOVE #OVLBASE,R1; load overlay base address MOVE #O1SIZE,D1.M; load overlay code size DO D1.M,_ENDLOOP; loop to move data words into P memory MOVE X:(R0)+,D0.M; get word of overlay from data memory MOVE D0.M,P:(R1)+; store word of overlay into P memory _ENDLOOP . . . ENDSEC
The overlay base address OVLBASE is made global with the XDEF statement. The over- lay segments and their sizes are made visible to the project section by using the XREF directive. The first ORG establishes where the overlay segments will be placed in mem- ory contiguously at load time. The second ORG sets up the absolute base address for the overlay area common to all of the overlay segments. Uninitialized space is allocated for the overlay area, immediately followed by code to move the overlay segments into the common area at runtime. The following Assembler command line will process the header file and all overlay segments: ASM96000 -A -B -L OVLPROJ OVER1 OVER2 OVER3 START
The Assembler is invoked in absolute mode (-A option), and generates an executable and listing file. All files on the command line are processed as a single assembly run and all are used to produce the output. OVLPROJ.ASM is read first and sets up the appropriate absolute addresses for later sections. Then each overlay file is read and loaded one after the other at external X memory address 100 hexadecimal. However, since each overlay
MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL 4-17 Software Project Management Example 2: Overlays module was intended to run starting at OVLBASE in P memory, all labels and jumps to those labels within the overlay code will be relative to the overlay base address. This means that the code in each of the overlay modules, when loaded by the overlay manage- ment code in the OVLPROJECT section, will start executing at internal P memory address 200 hexadecimal. The file START.ASM contains an END directive which indicates the program start address after loading.
4.7.2 Relative Mode Implementation In relative mode each of the overlay files is assembled separately to create individual ob- ject files. The object files are combined to build a single executable file. A preamble file OVLPROJ.ASM containing overlay management code might appear as follows. Note that this code assumes a DSP96000, but similar instructions would apply for other target pro- cessors: SECTION OVLPROJECT XDEF OVLBASE XREF OVL1,O1SIZE XREF OVL2,O2SIZE XREF OVL3,O3SIZE ORG PI: ; set base address for overlay MOVEOV1 ; code to move first overlay seg- ment MOVE #OVL1,R0 ; load overlay code address MOVE #OVLBASE,R1 ; load overlay base address MOVE #O1SIZE,D1.M ; load overlay code size DO D1.M,_ENDLOOP ; loop to move data words into P memory MOVE X:(R0)+,D0.M ; get word of overlay from data memory MOVE D0.M,P:(R1)+ ; store one word of overlay into P memory _ENDLOOP . . . OVLBASE DS $400 ; reserve space for overlay area ENDSEC
4-18 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Software Project Management Example 2: Overlays Note that the ORG to P space does not specify an absolute address. In order to obtain the same result from these files as in an absolute mode implementation the following link- er command line would be used: DSPLNK -B -M -OXE:100 -OPI:200 OVLPROJ OVER1 OVER2 OVER3
The linker scans the command line and sets the base addresses for X and P memory. Here the X default counter is set to hex 100 and mapped to external memory; likewise the P default counter is set to hex 200 and mapped to internal memory. Base addresses can also be established with the linker memory control file. The linker reads each input object file, placing the header file in internal P memory and combining the overlay modules into a contiguous block loaded into external X memory at location 100 hexadecimal. Any labels or jumps within the overlay blocks are resolved to addresses relative to the relocatable symbol OVLBASE. Since OVLBASE is the first load P memory address it is assigned the value 200 hexadecimal. The linker does not guaran- tee that a given symbol or section will begin at a particular location unless that information is explicitly specified in the linker memory control file. For more information on specific linker operations see the Motorola DSP Linker/Librarian Reference Manual.
MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL 4-19 Software Project Management Example 3: Bootstrap Overlay 4.8 EXAMPLE 3: BOOTSTRAP OVERLAY Many Motorola DSP processors, specifically those with RAM-based program memory, support a bootstrap mode of operation. This involves mapping a built-in ROM-based boot- strap program into P memory, executing the program to move user-supplied code from another location (usually EPROM) into program RAM, then transferring control to the user program. Because the user program is loaded in one location (e.g. EPROM) but moved to another for execution, it is a natural application for assembly language overlay seman- tics. Another wrinkle in bootstrap mode is that user instruction words are loaded in byte- wise fashion, such that the load location counter must be incremented by bytes rather than words. Consider the following section fragments contained in two files called SECT1.ASM and SECT2.ASM respectively: SECTION SECT1 ORG PI(1):,PE(2) START1 . .
SECTION SECT2 ORG PI(1):,PE(2) START2 . .
4-20 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Software Project Management Example 3: Bootstrap Overlay 4.8.1 Absolute Mode Implementation In order to avoid binding addresses within the individual modules, the programmer could devise a preamble file called BOOTPROJ.ASM which sets the appropriate options and establishes load and runtime base addresses: OPT LB ; increment load counter by bytes ORG PI(1):$100,PE(2):$C000 ; set runtime RAM address, ; bytewide load ROM ad- dress
The OPT directive with the LB option indicates that the Assembler should increment the load counter by the number of bytes in the target processor word. This guarantees that the EPROM addresses will be correct for bytewide loading during bootstrap processing. In the ORG directive, the runtime location counter, tagged as 1 and mapped to internal memory, is set to hex 100. The load counter is tagged as 2, mapped to external memory, and set to hex C000, where the built-in bootstrap program will begin loading bytes after processor reset. The files are assembled using the command below: ASM56100 -A -B -L BOOTPROJ SECT1 SECT2
The Assembler is invoked in absolute mode (-A option), and generates an executable and listing file. All files on the command line are processed as a single assembly run and all are used to produce the output. BOOTPROJ.ASM is read first and sets up the appropriate absolute addresses for later sections. Since no explicit base address was given in the sec- tion files, both load and runtime addresses will continue from one section to the other, e.g. they will be contiguous. For example, if only two words of instruction were between each of the START and END labels, the runtime value for END1 and START2 would be hex 102. However, the load address of the code associated with these labels, assuming a 16 bit target word size, would be C004 hexadecimal. Similarly, the runtime value for END2 would be 104 hex and the corresponding load address would be C008 hexadecimal.
4.8.2 Relative Mode Implementation In relative mode each of the source files is assembled separately to create individual ob- ject files. The object files are combined to build a single executable file. A preamble file is not necessary to handle bootstrap files in relative mode because the addresses are es- tablished at link time. In order to generate bytewide load addresses the LB option can be specified on the Assembler command line using the -O command line option: ASM56100 -B -L -OLB SECT1
This command assembles the file SECT1.ASM and creates a relocatable object file called SECT1.CLN. The listing file shows that the starting address of the section is zero; howev- er, because of the LB option on the command line the load counter will increment at twice the rate of the runtime counter (assuming a 16 bit DSP56100 family target processor). A
MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL 4-21 Software Project Management Example 3: Bootstrap Overlay similar command is used to assemble the SECT2 module. The two files are linked as fol- lows: DSPLNK -BBOOTPROJ.CLD "-OPI(1):100" "-OPE(2):C000" SECT1 SECT2
The linker scans the command line and sets the base addresses for P internal and exter- nal memory. The quotes around the -O options are necessary to avoid interpretation of parentheses by some host command interpreters. Here the P counter number 1 is set to hex 100 and mapped to internal memory; likewise the P counter number 2 is set to hex C000 and mapped to external memory. Base addresses can also be established with the linker memory control file. Since no explicit overlay base addresses were encountered in the source files, both load and runtime addresses for the sections will be adjacent and non-overlapping. Assuming a code size of 2 for each section and a 16 bit word size, the value for label START1 will be hex 100 and the value for START2 will be hex 102; the corresponding load addresses will be C000 hex and C004 hex, respectively. The execut- able output will be written to the file BOOTPROJ.CLD.
4-22 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Chapter 5 MACRO OPERATIONS AND CONDITIONAL ASSEMBLY
5.1 MACRO OPERATIONS Programming applications frequently involve the coding of a repeated pattern or group of instructions. Some patterns contain variable entries which change for each repetition of the pattern. Others are subject to conditional assembly for a given occurrence of the in- struction group. In either case, macros provide a shorthand notation for handling these instruction patterns. Having determined the iterated pattern, the programmer can, within the macro, designate selected fields of any statement as variable. Thereafter by invoking a macro the programmer can use the entire pattern as many times as needed, substituting different parameters for the designated variable portions of the statements. When the pattern is defined it is given a name. This name becomes the mnemonic by which the macro is subsequently invoked (called). If the name of the macro is the same as an existing Assembler directive or mnemonic opcode, the macro will replace the direc- tive or mnemonic opcode, and a warning will be issued. The warning can be avoided by the use of the RDIRECT directive, which is used to remove entries from the Assembler’s directive and mnemonic tables. If directives or mnemonics are removed from the Assem- bler’s tables, then no warning will be issued when the Assembler processes macros whose names are the same as the removed directive or mnemonic entries. However, if a macro is defined through the MACLIB directive which has the same name as an existing directive or opcode, it will not automatically replace that directive or opcode as previously described. In this case, the RDIRECT directive must be used to force the replacement. See the description of the MACLIB directive below. The macro call causes source statements to be generated. The generated statements may contain substitutable arguments. The statements produced by a macro call are rel- atively unrestricted as to type. They can be any processor instruction, almost any Assem- bler directive, or any previously-defined macro. Source statements resulting from a macro call are subject to the same conditions and restrictions that are applied to state- ments written by the programmer. To invoke a macro, the macro name must appear in the operation code field of a source statement. Any arguments are placed in the operand field. By suitably selecting the ar- guments in relation to their use as indicated by the macro definition, the programmer causes the Assembler to produce in-line coding variations of the macro definition.
MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL 5-1 Macro Operations And Conditional Assembly Macro Libraries The effect of a macro call is to produce in-line code to perform a predefined function. The code is inserted in the normal flow of the program so that the generated instructions are executed with the rest of the program each time the macro is called. An important feature in defining a macro is the use of macro calls within the macro defini- tion. The Assembler processes such nested macro calls at expansion time only. The nesting of one macro definition within another definition is permitted. However, the nested macro definition will not be processed until the primary macro is expanded. The macro must be defined before its appearance in a source statement operation field.
5.2 MACRO LIBRARIES The Motorola DSP Assembler allows for the maintenance of macro libraries with the MA- CLIB directive. This directive is used to specify the pathname (as defined by the host op- erating system) of a directory that contains macro definitions. Each macro definition must be in a separate file, and the file must be named the same as the macro with the extension .ASM added. For example, BLOCKMV.ASM would be a file that contained the definition of the macro called BLOCKMV. If a MACLIB directive has been specified in the source code and the Assembler encoun- ters a name in the operation field that is not a previously defined macro or is not contained in the directive or mnemonic tables, the directory specified in the MACLIB directive will be searched for a file of that name (with the .ASM extension added). If such a file is found, the current source line will be saved, and the file will be opened for input as an INCLUDE file. When the end of the file is encountered, the source line is restored and processing is resumed. Because the source line is restored, the processed file must have a macro definition of the unknown name, or an error will result when the source line is restored and processed. However, the processed file is not limited to macro definitions, and can include any legal source code statements. Multiple MACLIB directives may be given, in which case the As- sembler will search each directory in the order in which they were specified.
5.3 MACRO DEFINITION The definition of a macro consists of three parts: the header, which assigns a name to the macro and defines the dummy arguments; the body, which consists of prototype or skel- eton source statements; and the terminator. The header is the MACRO directive, its label, and the dummy argument list. The body contains the pattern of standard source state- ments. The terminator is the ENDM directive. The header of a macro definition has the form:
5-2 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Macro Operations And Conditional Assembly Macro Definition The required label is the symbol by which the macro will be called. The dummy argument list has the form: [
The dummy arguments are symbolic names that the macro processor will replace with ar- guments when the macro is expanded (called). Each dummy argument must obey the same rules as global symbol names. Dummy argument names that are preceded by an underscore are not allowed. Dummy arguments are separated by commas. For example, consider the following macro definition:
N_R_MUL MACRO NMUL,AVEC,BVEC,RESULT header ; ;This macro implements N real multiplies ;RESULT(I) = AVEC(I) * BVEC(I) I=1..NMUL ;where ; NMUL = number of multiplications ; AVEC = base address of array AVEC(I) ; BVEC = base address of array BVEC(I) ; RESULT = base address of array RESULT(I) ; MOVE #AVEC,R0 body MOVE #BVEC,R4 MOVE #RESULT,R1 MOVE X:(R0)+,D4.S Y:(R4)+,D7.S DO #NMUL,_ENDLOOP FMPY.S D4,D7,D0 X:(R0)+,D4.SY:(R4)+,D7.S MOVE D0.S,X:(R1)+ _ENDLOOP ENDM terminator
When a macro call is executed, the dummy arguments within the macro definition (NMUL,AVEC,BVEC,RESULT in the example above) are replaced with the correspond- ing argument as defined by the macro call. All local labels within a macro are considered distinct for the currently active level of macro expansion (unless the macro local label override is used, see below). These local labels are valid for the entire macro expansion and are not considered bounded by non-local la- bels. Therefore, all local labels within a macro must be unique. This mechanism allows the programmer to freely use local labels within a macro definition without regard to the number of times that the macro is expanded. Non-local labels within a macro expansion are considered to be normal labels and thus cannot occur more than once unless used with the SET directive (see Chapter 6).
MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL 5-3 Macro Operations And Conditional Assembly Macro Calls When specifying a local label within the body of a macro, the programmer must be aware that the label symbol is valid for the entire body of the current level of macro expansion. It is not valid for any nested macros within the current level of expansion. The example above shows why the local label feature is useful. If the macro N_R_MUL were called several times, there would be several _ENDLOOP labels resulting from the macro expan- sions. This is acceptable because each _ENDLOOP label is considered private to a par- ticular instance of macro expansion. It is sometimes desirable to pass local labels as macro arguments to be used within the macro as address references (e.g. MOVE #_LABEL,R0). The Assembler effectively dis- allows this, however, since underscore label references within a macro invocation are re- garded as labels local to that expansion of the macro. A macro local label override is provided which causes local symbol lookup to have normal scope rather than macro call scope. If a circumflex (^) precedes an expression containing an underscore label, at ex- pansion the associated term will be evaluated using the normal local label list rather than the macro local label list. The operator has no effect on normal labels or outside a macro expansion.
5.4 MACRO CALLS When a macro is invoked the statement causing the action is termed a macro call. The syntax of a macro call consists of the following fields: [
The argument field can have the form: [
The macro call statement is made up of three fields besides the comment field: the
5-4 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Macro Operations And Conditional Assembly Dummy Argument Operators argument can be declared null when calling a macro. However, it must be declared ex- plicitly null. Null arguments can be specified in four ways: by writing the delimiting com- mas in succession with no intervening spaces, by terminating the argument list with a comma and omitting the rest of the argument list, by declaring the argument as a null string, or by simply omitting some or all of the arguments. A null argument will cause no character to be substituted in the generated statements that reference the argument. If more arguments are supplied in the macro call than appear in the macro definition, a warning will be output by the Assembler.
5.5 DUMMY ARGUMENT OPERATORS The Assembler macro processor provides for text substitution of arguments during macro expansion. In order to make the argument substitution facility more flexible, the Assem- bler also recognizes certain text operators within macro definitions which allow for trans- formations of the argument text. These operators can be used for text concatenation, numeric conversion, and string handling.
5.5.1 Dummy argument concatenation operator - \ Dummy arguments that are intended to be concatenated with other characters must be preceded by the concatenation operator, '\' to separate them from the rest of the charac- ters. The argument may precede or follow the adjoining text, but there must be no inter- vening blanks between the concatenation operator and the rest of the characters. To position an argument between two alphanumeric characters, place a backslash both be- fore and after the argument name. For example, consider the following macro definition: SWAP_REG MACRO REG1,REG2 ;swap REG1,REG2 using X0 as temp MOVE R\REG1,X0 MOVE R\REG2,R\REG1 MOVE X0,R\REG2 ENDM
If this macro were called with the following statement, SWAP_REG 0,1 then for the macro expansion, the macro processor would substitute the character 0 for the dummy argument REG1, and the character 1 for the dummy argument REG2. The concatenation operator (\) indicates to the macro processor that the substitution charac- ters for the dummy arguments are to be concatenated in both cases with the character R. The resulting expansion of this macro call would be: MOVE R0,X0 MOVE R1,R0 MOVE X0,R1
MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL 5-5 Macro Operations And Conditional Assembly Dummy Argument Operators 5.5.2 Return value operator - ? Another macro definition operator is the question mark (?) that returns the value of a sym- bol. When the macro processor encounters this operator, the ?
If the source file contained the following SET statements and macro call, AREG SET 0 BREG SET 1 SWAP_SYM AREG,BREG then the sequence of events would be as follows: the macro processor would first substi- tute the characters AREG for each occurrence of REG1 and BREG for each occurrence of REG2. For discussion purposes (this would never appear on the source listing), the intermediate macro expansion would be: MOVE R\?AREG,X0 MOVE R\?BREG,R\?AREG MOVE X0,R\?BREG
The macro processor would then replace ?AREG with the character 0 and ?BREG with the character 1, since 0 is the value of the symbol AREG and 1 is the value of BREG. The resulting intermediate expansion would be: MOVE R\0,X0 MOVE R\1,R\0 MOVE X0,R\1
Next, the macro processor would apply the concatenation operator (\), and the resulting expansion as it would appear on the source listing would be: MOVE R0,X0 MOVE R1,R0 MOVE X0,R1
5-6 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Macro Operations And Conditional Assembly Dummy Argument Operators 5.5.3 Return hex value operator - % The percent sign (%) is similar to the standard return value operator except that it returns the hexadecimal value of a symbol. When the macro processor encounters this operator, the %
This macro generates a label consisting of the concatenation of the label prefix argument and a value that is interpreted as hexadecimal. If this macro were called as follows, NUM SET 10 GEN_LAB HEX,NUM,'NOP' the macro processor would first substitute the characters HEX for LAB, then it would re- place %VAL with the character A, since A is the hexadecimal representation for the dec- imal integer 10. Next, the macro processor would apply the concatenation operator (\). Finally, the string 'NOP' would be substituted for the STMT argument. The resulting ex- pansion as it would appear in the listing file would be: HEXA NOP
The percent sign is also the character used to indicate a binary constant. If a binary con- stant is required inside a macro it may be necessary to enclose the constant in parenthe- ses or escape the constant by following the percent sign by a backslash (\).
5.5.4 Dummy argument string operator - " Another dummy argument operator is the double quote ("). This character is replaced with a single quote by the macro processor, but following characters are still examined for dummy argument names. The effect in the macro call is to transform any enclosed dummy arguments into literal strings. For example, consider the following macro definition: STR_MAC MACRO STRING DC "STRING" ENDM
If this macro were called with the following macro expansion line, STR_MAC ABCD then the resulting macro expansion would be: DC 'ABCD'
MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL 5-7 Macro Operations And Conditional Assembly Dummy Argument Operators Double quotes also make possible DEFINE directive expansion within quoted strings. Be- cause of this overloading of the double quotes, care must be taken to insure against inap- propriate expansions in macro definitions. Since DEFINE expansion occurs before macro substitution, any DEFINE symbols are replaced first within a macro dummy argument string: DEFINE LONG 'short' STR_MAC MACRO STRING MSG 'This is a LONG STRING' MSG "This is a LONG STRING" ENDM
If this macro were invoked as follows, STR_MAC sentence then the resulting expansion would be: MSG 'This is a LONG STRING' MSG 'This is a short sentence'
5.5.5 Macro local label override operator - ^ It may be desirable to pass a local label as a macro argument to be used as an address reference within the macro body. If a circumflex (^) precedes an expression containing an underscore label, during macro expansion the associated term will be evaluated with normal local label scope rather than macro call scope. Such interpretation disables the usual local label semantics for this particular reference within the macro call. Here is an example: LOAD MACRO ADDR MOVE P:^ADDR,R0 ENDM
The macro local label override operator causes the ADDR argument to be interpreted as a local label outside the macro if the expanded argument has a leading underscore. If there is no leading underscore on the actual argument then the override operator has no effect. Consider the following macro call: _LOCAL LOAD _LOCAL
Without the local label override in the macro definition, an error would occur at the macro call because a symbol _LOCAL was not defined in the body of the macro. Because the circumflex was used the value of _LOCAL gets moved to R0. Note that any arbitrary string may be used as the actual parameter to the LOAD macro. The override operator has an effect only with underscore labels. Care must be exercised, however, in not defining a
5-8 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Macro Operations And Conditional Assembly DUP, DUPA, DUPC, DUPF Directives macro label called _LOCAL and attempting to reference it as in the above example. In that case the macro local label override operator prevents the Assembler from seeing the local label definition for that reference, and an error would result.
5.6 DUP, DUPA, DUPC, DUPF DIRECTIVES The DUP, DUPA, DUPC, and DUPF directives are specialized macro forms. They can be thought of as a simultaneous definition and call of an unnamed macro. The source state- ments between the DUP, DUPA, DUPC, and DUPF directives and the ENDM directive fol- low the same rules as macro definitions, including (in the case of DUPA, DUPC, and DUPF) the dummy operator characters described previously. For a detailed description of these directives, refer to Chapter 6.
5.7 CONDITIONAL ASSEMBLY Conditional assembly facilitates the writing of comprehensive source programs that can cover many conditions. Assembly conditions may be specified through the use of argu- ments in the case of macros, and through definition of symbols via the DEFINE, SET, and EQU directives. Variations of parameters can then cause assembly of only those parts necessary for the given conditions. The built-in functions of the Assembler provide a ver- satile means of testing many conditions of the assembly environment (see Section 3.8 for more information on the Assembler built-in functions). Conditional directives can also be used within a macro definition to ensure at expansion time that arguments fall within a range of allowable values. In this way macros become self-checking and can generate error messages to any desired level of detail. The conditional assembly directive IF has the following form: IF
A section of a program that is to be conditionally assembled must be bounded by an IF- ENDIF directive pair. If the optional ELSE directive is not present, then the source state- ments following the IF directive and up to the next ENDIF directive will be included as part of the source file being assembled only if the
MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL 5-9 Macro Operations And Conditional Assembly Conditional Assembly the statements between the IF and ELSE directives will be skipped, and the statements between the ELSE and ENDIF directives will be assembled.
5-10 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Chapter 6 ASSEMBLER SIGNIFICANT CHARACTERS AND DIRECTIVES
6.1 INTRODUCTION This chapter describes the directives that are recognized by the Motorola DSP Assem- bler. The Assembler directives are instructions to the Assembler rather than instructions to be directly translated into object code. In addition, this chapter describes special char- acters that are considered significant to the Assembler.
6.2 ASSEMBLER SIGNIFICANT CHARACTERS There are several one and two character sequences that are significant to the Assembler. Some have multiple meanings depending on the context in which they are used. Special characters associated with expression evaluation are described in Chapter 3. Other As- sembler-significant characters are: ; - Comment delimiter ;; - Unreported comment delimiter \ - Line continuation character or Macro dummy argument concatenation operator ? - Macro value substitution operator % - Macro hex value substitution operator ^ - Macro local label override operator " - Macro string delimiter or Quoted string DEFINE expansion character @ - Function delimiter * - Location counter substitution ++ - String concatenation operator [ ] - Substring delimiter << - I/O short addressing mode force operator < - Short addressing mode force operator > - Long addressing mode force operator # - Immediate addressing mode operator
MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL 6-1 Assembler Significant Characters And Directives Assembler Directives #< - Immediate short addressing mode force operator #> - Immediate long addressing mode force operator
6.3 ASSEMBLER DIRECTIVES Assembler directives can be grouped by function into seven types: 1. Assembly control 2. Symbol definition 3. Data definition/storage allocation 4. Listing control and options 5. Object file control 6. Macros and conditional assembly 7. Structured programming
6.3.1 Assembly Control The directives used for assembly control are: COMMENT - Start comment lines DEFINE - Define substitution string END - End of source program FAIL - Programmer generated error message FORCE - Set operand forcing mode HIMEM - Set high memory bounds INCLUDE - Include secondary file LOMEM - Set low memory bounds MODE - Change relocation mode MSG - Programmer generated message ORG - Initialize memory space and location counters RADIX - Change input radix for constants RDIRECT - Remove directive or mnemonic from table SCSJMP - Set structured control branching mode SCSREG - Reassign structured control statement registers UNDEF - Undefine DEFINE symbol WARN - Programmer generated warning
6-2 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Assembler Significant Characters And Directives Assembler Directives 6.3.2 Symbol Definition The directives used to control symbol definition are: ENDSEC - End section EQU - Equate symbol to a value GLOBAL - Global section symbol declaration GSET - Set global symbol to a value LOCAL - Local section symbol declaration SECTION - Start section SET - Set symbol to a value XDEF - External section symbol definition XREF - External section symbol reference
6.3.3 Data Definition/Storage Allocation The directives used to control constant data definition and storage allocation are: BADDR - Set buffer address BSB - Block storage bit-reverse BSC - Block storage of constant BSM - Block storage modulo BUFFER - Start buffer DC - Define constant DCB - Define constant byte DS - Define storage DSM - Define modulo storage DSR - Define reverse carry storage ENDBUF - End buffer
6.3.4 Listing Control and Options The directives used to control the output listing are: LIST - List the assembly LSTCOL - Set listing field widths NOLIST - Stop assembly listing OPT - Assembler options PAGE - Top of page/size page PRCTL - Send control string to printer STITLE - Initialize program subtitle TABS - Set listing tab stops TITLE - Initialize program title
MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL 6-3 Assembler Significant Characters And Directives Assembler Directives 6.3.5 Object File Control The directives used for control of the object file are: COBJ - Comment object code IDENT - Object code identification record SYMOBJ - Write symbol information to object file
6.3.6 Macros and Conditional Assembly The directives used for macros and conditional assembly are: DUP - Duplicate sequence of source lines DUPA - Duplicate sequence with arguments DUPC - Duplicate sequence with characters DUPF - Duplicate sequence in loop ENDIF - End of conditional assembly ENDM - End of macro definition EXITM - Exit macro IF - Conditional assembly directive MACLIB - Macro library MACRO - Macro definition PMACRO - Purge macro definition
6.3.7 Structured Programming The directives used for structured programming are: .BREAK - Exit from structured loop construct .CONTINUE - Continue next iteration of structured loop .ELSE - Perform following statements when .IF false .ENDF - End of .FOR loop .ENDI - End of .IF condition .ENDL - End of hardware loop .ENDW - End of .WHILE loop .FOR - Begin .FOR loop .IF - Begin .IF condition .LOOP - Begin hardware loop .REPEAT - Begin .REPEAT loop .UNTIL - End of .REPEAT loop .WHILE - Begin .WHILE loop
6-4 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Assembler Significant Characters And Directives Assembler Directives Individual descriptions of each of the Assembler special characters and directives follow. They include usage guidelines, functional descriptions, and examples. Structured pro- gramming directives are discussed separately in Chapter 7. Some directives require a label field, while in many cases a label is optional. If the descrip- tion of an Assembler directive does not indicate a mandatory or optional label field, then a label is not allowed on the same line as the directive. In general, it is disallowed to use the label field of a data directive (such as DS, BSC, or buffer directives) in an expression used to define the space being allocated. This is because in some cases the label value cannot be determined until the operand field is fully evaluated. For example: BADDS DS BADDS The line above is invalid because the label BADDS cannot reasonably be determined in this context.
MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL 6-5 Assembler Significant Characters And Directives Assembler Directives ; Comment Delimiter Character
Any number of characters preceded by a semicolon (;), but not part of a literal string, is considered a comment. Comments are not significant to the Assembler, but they can be used to document the source program. Comments will be reproduced in the Assembler output listing. Comments are normally preserved in macro definitions, but this option can be turned off (see the OPT directive, this chapter). Comments can occupy an entire line, or can be placed after the last Assembler-significant field in a source statement. A comment starting in the first column of the source file will be aligned with the label field in the listing file. Otherwise, the comment will be shifted right and aligned with the comment field in the listing file. EXAMPLE: ; THIS COMMENT BEGINS IN COLUMN 1 OF THE SOURCE FILE
LOOP JSR COMPUTE ; THIS IS A TRAILING COMMENT ; THESE TWO COMMENTS ARE PRECEDED ; BY A TAB IN THE SOURCE FILE
6-6 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Assembler Significant Characters And Directives Assembler Directives ;; Unreported Comment Delimiter Characters
Unreported comments are any number of characters preceded by two consecutive semi- colons (;;) that are not part of a literal string. Unreported comments are not considered significant by the Assembler, and can be included in the source statement, following the same rules as normal comments. However, unreported comments are never reproduced on the Assembler output listing, and are never saved as part of macro definitions. EXAMPLE: ;; THESE LINES WILL NOT BE REPRODUCED ;; IN THE SOURCE LISTING
MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL 6-7 Assembler Significant Characters And Directives Assembler Directives \ Line Continuation Character or Macro Argument Concatenation Character
Line Continuation The backslash character (\), if used as the last character on a line, indicates to the Assem- bler that the source statement is continued on the following line. The continuation line will be concatenated to the previous line of the source statement, and the result will be pro- cessed by the Assembler as if it were a single line source statement. The maximum source statement length (the first line and any continuation lines) is 512 characters. EXAMPLE: ; THIS COMMENT \ EXTENDS OVER \ THREE LINES
Macro Argument Concatenation The backslash (\) is also used to cause the concatenation of a macro dummy argument with other adjacent alphanumeric characters. For the macro processor to recognize dum- my arguments, they must normally be separated from other alphanumeric characters by a non-symbol character. However, sometimes it is desirable to concatenate the argument characters with other characters. If an argument is to be concatenated in front of or be- hind some other symbol characters, then it must be followed by or preceded by the back- slash, respectively. EXAMPLE: Suppose the source input file contained the following macro definition: SWAP_REG MACRO REG1,REG2 ;swap REG1,REG2 using D4.L as temp MOVE R\REG1,D4.L MOVE R\REG2,R\REG1 MOVE D4.L,R\REG2 ENDM
6-8 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Assembler Significant Characters And Directives Assembler Directives The concatenation operator (\) indicates to the macro processor that the substitution char- acters for the dummy arguments are to be concatenated in both cases with the character R. If this macro were called with the following statement, SWAP_REG 0,1 the resulting expansion would be: MOVE R0,D4.L MOVE R1,R0 MOVE D4.L,R1
MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL 6-9 Assembler Significant Characters And Directives Assembler Directives ? Return Value of Symbol Character
The ?
If the source file contained the following SET statements and macro call, AREG SET 0 BREG SET 1 SWAP_SYM AREG,BREG the resulting expansion as it would appear on the source listing would be: MOVE R0,D4.L MOVE R1,R0 MOVE D4.L,R1
6-10 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Assembler Significant Characters And Directives Assembler Directives % Return Hex Value of Symbol Character
The %
If this macro were called as follows, NUM SET 10 GEN_LAB HEX,NUM,'NOP'
The resulting expansion as it would appear in the listing file would be: HEXA NOP
MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL 6-11 Assembler Significant Characters And Directives Assembler Directives ^ Macro Local Label Override
The circumflex (^), when used as a unary expression operator in a macro expansion, will cause any local labels in its associated term to be evaluated at normal scope rather than macro scope. This means that any underscore labels in the expression term following the circumflex will not be searched for in the macro local label list. The operator has no effect on normal labels or outside of a macro expansion. The circumflex operator is useful for passing local labels as macro arguments to be used as referents in the macro. Note that the circumflex is also used as the binary exclusive OR operator. EXAMPLE: Consider the following macro definition: LOAD MACRO ADDR MOVE P:^ADDR,R0 ENDM
If this macro were called as follows, _LOCAL LOAD _LOCAL the Assembler would ordinarily issue an error since _LOCAL is not defined within the body of the macro. With the override operator the Assembler recognizes the _LOCAL symbol outside the macro expansion and uses that value in the MOVE instruction.
6-12 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Assembler Significant Characters And Directives Assembler Directives " Macro String Delimiter or Quoted String DEFINE Expansion Character
Macro String The double quote ("), when used in macro definitions, is transformed by the macro pro- cessor into the string delimiter, the single quote ('). The macro processor examines the characters between the double quotes for any macro arguments. This mechanism allows the use of macro arguments as literal strings. EXAMPLE: Using the following macro definition, CSTR MACRO STRING DC "STRING" ENDM and a macro call, CSTR ABCD the resulting macro expansion would be: DC 'ABCD'
Quoted String DEFINE Expansion A sequence of characters which matches a symbol created with a DEFINE directive will not be expanded if the character sequence is contained within a quoted string. Assembler strings generally are enclosed in single quotes ('). If the string is enclosed in double
MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL 6-13 Assembler Significant Characters And Directives Assembler Directives quotes (") then DEFINE symbols will be expanded within the string. In all other respects usage of double quotes is equivalent to that of single quotes. EXAMPLE: Consider the source fragment below: DEFINE LONG 'short' STR_MAC MACRO STRING MSG 'This is a LONG STRING' MSG "This is a LONG STRING" ENDM
If this macro were invoked as follows, STR_MAC sentence then the resulting expansion would be: MSG 'This is a LONG STRING' MSG 'This is a short sentence'
6-14 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Assembler Significant Characters And Directives Assembler Directives @ Function Delimiter
All Assembler built-in functions start with the @ symbol. See Section 3.8 for a full discus- sion of these functions. EXAMPLE: SVAL EQU @SQT(FVAL) ; OBTAIN SQUARE ROOT
MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL 6-15 Assembler Significant Characters And Directives Assembler Directives * Location Counter Substitution
When used as an operand in an expression, the asterisk represents the current integer value of the runtime location counter. EXAMPLE: ORG X:$100
XBASE EQU *+$20 ; XBASE = $120
6-16 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Assembler Significant Characters And Directives Assembler Directives ++ String Concatenation Operator
Any two strings can be concatenated with the string concatenation operator (++). The two strings must each be enclosed by single or double quotes, and there must be no interven- ing blanks between the string concatenation operator and the two strings. EXAMPLE: 'ABC'++'DEF' = 'ABCDEF'
MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL 6-17 Assembler Significant Characters And Directives Assembler Directives [ ] Substring Delimiter
[
6-18 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Assembler Significant Characters And Directives Assembler Directives << I/O Short Addressing Mode Force Operator
Many DSP instructions allow an I/O short form of addressing. If the value of an absolute address is known to the Assembler on pass one, then the Assembler will always pick the shortest form of addressing consistent with the instruction format. If the absolute address is not known to the Assembler on pass one (that is, the address is a forward or external reference), then the Assembler will pick the long form of addressing by default. If this is not desired, then the I/O short form of addressing can be forced by preceding the absolute address by the I/O short addressing mode force operator (<<). EXAMPLE: Since the symbol IOPORT is a forward reference in the following sequence of source lines, the Assembler would pick the long absolute form of addressing by default: BTST #4,Y:IOPORT IOPORT EQU Y:$FFF3
Because the long absolute addressing mode would cause the instruction to be two words long instead of one word for the I/O short absolute addressing mode, it would be desirable to force the I/O short absolute addressing mode as shown below: BTST #4,Y:< MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL 6-19 Assembler Significant Characters And Directives Assembler Directives < Short Addressing Mode Force Operator Many DSP instructions allow a short form of addressing. If the value of an absolute ad- dress is known to the Assembler on pass one, or the FORCE SHORT directive is active, then the Assembler will always pick the shortest form of addressing consistent with the instruction format. If the absolute address is not known to the Assembler on pass one (that is, the address is a forward or external reference), then the Assembler will pick the long form of addressing by default. If this is not desired, then the short absolute form of addressing can be forced by preceding the absolute address by the short addressing mode force operator (<). See also: FORCE EXAMPLE: Since the symbol DATAST is a forward reference in the following sequence of source lines, the Assembler would pick the long absolute form of addressing by default: MOVE D0.L,Y:DATAST DATAST EQU Y:$23 Because the long absolute addressing mode would cause the instruction to be two words long instead of one word for the short absolute addressing mode, it would be desirable to force the short absolute addressing mode as shown below: MOVE D0.L,Y: 6-20 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Assembler Significant Characters And Directives Assembler Directives > Long Addressing Mode Force Operator Many DSP instructions allow a long form of addressing. If the value of an absolute ad- dress is known to the Assembler on pass one, then the Assembler will always pick the shortest form of addressing consistent with the instruction format, unless the FORCE LONG directive is active. If this is not desired, then the long absolute form of addressing can be forced by preceding the absolute address by the long addressing mode force op- erator (>). See also: FORCE EXAMPLE: Since the symbol DATAST is a not a forward reference in the following sequence of source lines, the Assembler would pick the short absolute form of addressing: DATAST EQU Y:$23 MOVE D0.L,Y:DATAST If this is not desirable, then the long absolute addressing mode can be forced as shown below: DATAST EQU Y:$23 MOVE D0.L,Y:>DATAST MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL 6-21 Assembler Significant Characters And Directives Assembler Directives # Immediate Addressing Mode The pound sign (#) is used to indicate to the Assembler to use the immediate addressing mode. EXAMPLE: CNST EQU $5 MOVE #CNST,D0.L 6-22 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Assembler Significant Characters And Directives Assembler Directives #< Immediate Short Addressing Mode Force Operator Many DSP instructions allow a short immediate form of addressing. If the immediate data is known to the Assembler on pass one (not a forward or external reference), or the FORCE SHORT directive is active, then the Assembler will always pick the shortest form of immediate addressing consistent with the instruction. If the immediate data is a forward or external reference, then the Assembler will pick the long form of immediate addressing by default. If this is not desired, then the short form of addressing can be forced using the immediate short addressing mode force operator (#<). See also: FORCE EXAMPLE: In the following sequence of source lines, the symbol CNST is not known to the Assembler on pass one, and therefore, the Assembler would use the long immediate addressing form for the MOVE instruction. MOVE #CNST,D0.L CNST EQU $5 Because the long immediate addressing mode makes the instruction two words long in- stead of one word for the immediate short addressing mode, it may be desirable to force the immediate short addressing mode as shown below: MOVE # MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL 6-23 Assembler Significant Characters And Directives Assembler Directives #> Immediate Long Addressing Mode Force Operator Many DSP instructions allow a long immediate form of addressing. If the immediate data is known to the Assembler on pass one (not a forward or external reference), then the As- sembler will always pick the shortest form of immediate addressing consistent with the in- struction, unless the FORCE LONG directive is active. If this is not desired, then the long form of addressing can be forced using the immediate long addressing mode force oper- ator (#>). See also: FORCE EXAMPLE: In the following sequence of source lines, the symbol CNST is known to the Assembler on pass one, and therefore, the Assembler would use the short immediate addressing form for the MOVE instruction. CNST EQU $5 MOVE #CNST,D0.L If this is not desirable, then the long immediate form of addressing can be forced as shown below: CNST EQU $5 MOVE #>CNST,D0.L 6-24 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Assembler Significant Characters And Directives Assembler Directives BADDR Set Buffer Address BADDR MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL 6-25 Assembler Significant Characters And Directives Assembler Directives BSB Block Storage Bit-Reverse [ 6-26 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Assembler Significant Characters And Directives Assembler Directives BSC Block Storage of Constant [ MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL 6-27 Assembler Significant Characters And Directives Assembler Directives BSM Block Storage Modulo [ 6-28 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Assembler Significant Characters And Directives Assembler Directives BUFFER Start Buffer BUFFER MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL 6-29 Assembler Significant Characters And Directives Assembler Directives COBJ Comment Object File COBJ 6-30 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Assembler Significant Characters And Directives Assembler Directives COMMENT Start Comment Lines COMMENT MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL 6-31 Assembler Significant Characters And Directives Assembler Directives DC Define Constant [ 'ABCD' = $414243 $440000 See also: BSC, DCB EXAMPLE: TABLE DC 1426,253,$2662,'ABCD' CHARS DC 'A','B','C','D' 6-32 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Assembler Significant Characters And Directives Assembler Directives DCB Define Constant Byte [ See also: BSC, DC EXAMPLE: TABLE DCB 'two',0,'strings',0 CHARS DCB 'A','B','C','D' MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL 6-33 Assembler Significant Characters And Directives Assembler Directives DEFINE Define Substitution String DEFINE 6-34 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Assembler Significant Characters And Directives Assembler Directives DS Define Storage [ MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL 6-35 Assembler Significant Characters And Directives Assembler Directives DSM Define Modulo Storage [ 6-36 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Assembler Significant Characters And Directives Assembler Directives DSR Define Reverse Carry Storage [ MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL 6-37 Assembler Significant Characters And Directives Assembler Directives DUP Duplicate Sequence of Source Lines [ 6-38 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Assembler Significant Characters And Directives Assembler Directives Note that the lines DUP COUNT ;ASR BY COUNT ENDM will only be shown on the source listing if the MD option is enabled. The lines ASR D0 ASR D0 ASR D0 will only be shown on the source listing if the MEX option is enabled. See the OPT directive in this chapter for more information on the MD and MEX options. MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL 6-39 Assembler Significant Characters And Directives Assembler Directives DUPA Duplicate Sequence With Arguments [ 6-40 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Assembler Significant Characters And Directives Assembler Directives Note that the lines DUPA VALUE,12,32,34 ENDM will only be shown on the source listing if the MD option is enabled. The lines DC 12 DC 32 DC 34 will only be shown on the source listing if the MEX option is enabled. See the OPT directive in this chapter for more information on the MD and MEX options. MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL 6-41 Assembler Significant Characters And Directives Assembler Directives DUPC Duplicate Sequence With Characters [ Note that the lines DUPC VALUE,'123' ENDM will only be shown on the source listing if the MD option is enabled. The lines DC 1 DC 2 DC 3 will only be shown on the source listing if the MEX option is enabled. See the OPT directive in this chapter for more information on the MD and MEX options. 6-42 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Assembler Significant Characters And Directives Assembler Directives DUPF Duplicate Sequence In Loop [ MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL 6-43 Assembler Significant Characters And Directives Assembler Directives Note that the lines DUPF NUM,0,7 ENDM will only be shown on the source listing if the MD option is enabled. The lines MOVE #0,R0 MOVE #0,R1 MOVE #0,R2 MOVE #0,R3 MOVE #0,R4 MOVE #0,R5 MOVE #0,R6 MOVE #0,R7 will only be shown on the source listing if the MEX option is enabled. See the OPT directive in this chapter for more information on the MD and MEX options. 6-44 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Assembler Significant Characters And Directives Assembler Directives END End of Source Program END [ MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL 6-45 Assembler Significant Characters And Directives Assembler Directives ENDBUF End Buffer ENDBUF The ENDBUF directive is used to signify the end of a buffer block. The runtime location counter will remain just beyond the end of the buffer when the ENDBUF directive is en- countered. A label is not allowed with this directive. See also: BUFFER EXAMPLE: ORG X:$100 BUF BUFFER R,64 ; uninitialized reverse-carry buffer ENDBUF 6-46 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Assembler Significant Characters And Directives Assembler Directives ENDIF End of Conditional Assembly ENDIF The ENDIF directive is used to signify the end of the current level of conditional assembly. Conditional assembly directives can be nested to any level, but the ENDIF directive al- ways refers to the most previous IF directive. A label is not allowed with this directive. See also: IF EXAMPLE: IF @REL() SAVEPC SET * ; Save current program counter ENDIF MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL 6-47 Assembler Significant Characters And Directives Assembler Directives ENDM End of Macro Definition ENDM Every MACRO, DUP, DUPA, and DUPC directive must be terminated by an ENDM direc- tive. A label is not allowed with this directive. See also: DUP, DUPA, DUPC, MACRO EXAMPLE: SWAP_SYM MACRO REG1,REG ;swap REG1,REG2 using D4.L as temp MOVE R\?REG1,D4.L MOVE R\?REG2,R\?REG1 MOVE D4.L,R\?REG2 ENDM 6-48 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Assembler Significant Characters And Directives Assembler Directives ENDSEC End Section ENDSEC Every SECTION directive must be terminated by an ENDSEC directive. A label is not allowed with this directive. See also: SECTION EXAMPLE: SECTION COEFF ORG Y: VALUES BSC $100 ; Initialize to zero ENDSEC MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL 6-49 Assembler Significant Characters And Directives Assembler Directives EQU Equate Symbol to a Value This would assign the value $4000 with a memory space attribute of X to the symbol A_D_PORT. COMPUTE EQU @LCV(L) @LCV(L) is used to refer to the value and memory space attribute of the load location counter. This value and memory space attribute would be assigned to the symbol COM- PUTE. 6-50 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Assembler Significant Characters And Directives Assembler Directives EXITM Exit Macro EXITM The EXITM directive will cause immediate termination of a macro expansion. It is useful when used with the conditional assembly directive IF to terminate macro expansion when error conditions are detected. A label is not allowed with this directive. See also: DUP, DUPA, DUPC, MACRO EXAMPLE: CALC MACRO XVAL,YVAL IF XVAL<0 FAIL 'Macro parameter value out of range' EXITM ; Exit macro ENDIF . . . ENDM MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL 6-51 Assembler Significant Characters And Directives Assembler Directives FAIL Programmer Generated Error FAIL [{ 6-52 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Assembler Significant Characters And Directives Assembler Directives FORCE Set Operand Forcing Mode FORCE {SHORT | LONG | NONE} The FORCE directive causes the Assembler to force all immediate, memory, and address operands to the specified mode as if an explicit forcing operator were used. Note that if a relocatable operand value forced short is determined to be too large for the instruction word, an error will occur at link time, not during assembly. Explicit forcing operators over- ride the effect of this directive. A label is not allowed with this directive. See also: <, >, #<, #> EXAMPLE: FORCE SHORT ; force operands short MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL 6-53 Assembler Significant Characters And Directives Assembler Directives GLOBAL Global Section Symbol Declaration GLOBAL 6-54 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Assembler Significant Characters And Directives Assembler Directives GSET Set Global Symbol to a Value MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL 6-55 Assembler Significant Characters And Directives Assembler Directives HIMEM Set High Memory Bounds HIMEM 6-56 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Assembler Significant Characters And Directives Assembler Directives IDENT Object Code Identification Record [ MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL 6-57 Assembler Significant Characters And Directives Assembler Directives IF Conditional Assembly Directive IF Part of a program that is to be conditionally assembled must be bounded by an IF-ENDIF directive pair. If the optional ELSE directive is not present, then the source statements following the IF directive and up to the next ENDIF directive will be included as part of the source file being assembled only if the IF @LST>0 DUP @LST ; Unwind LIST directive stack NOLIST ENDM ENDIF 6-58 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Assembler Significant Characters And Directives Assembler Directives INCLUDE Include Secondary File INCLUDE INCLUDE 'storage\mem.asm' ; MS-DOS example INCLUDE MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL 6-59 Assembler Significant Characters And Directives Assembler Directives LIST List the Assembly LIST Print the listing from this point on. The LIST directive will not be printed, but the subse- quent source lines will be output to the source listing. The default is to print the source listing. If the IL option has been specified, the LIST directive has no effect when encoun- tered within the source program. The LIST directive actually increments a counter that is checked for a positive value and is symmetrical with respect to the NOLIST directive. Note the following sequence: ; Counter value currently 1 LIST ; Counter value = 2 LIST ; Counter value = 3 NOLIST ; Counter value = 2 NOLIST ; Counter value = 1 The listing still would not be disabled until another NOLIST directive was issued. A label is not allowed with this directive. See also: NOLIST, OPT EXAMPLE: IF LISTON LIST ; Turn the listing back on ENDIF 6-60 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Assembler Significant Characters And Directives Assembler Directives LOCAL Local Section Symbol Declaration LOCAL MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL 6-61 Assembler Significant Characters And Directives Assembler Directives LOMEM Set Low Memory Bounds LOMEM 6-62 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Assembler Significant Characters And Directives Assembler Directives LSTCOL Set Listing Field Widths LSTCOL [ Sets the width of the output fields in the source listing. Widths are specified in terms of column positions. The starting position of any field is relative to its predecessor except for the label field, which always starts at the same position relative to page left margin, pro- gram counter value, and cycle count display. The widths may be expressed as any pos- itive absolute integer expression. However, if the width is not adequate to accommodate the contents of a field, the text is separated from the next field by at least one space. Any field for which the default is desired may be null. A null field can be indicated by two adjacent commas with no intervening space or by omitting any trailing fields altogether. If the LSTCOL directive is given with no arguments all field widths are reset to their default values. A label is not allowed with this directive. See also: PAGE EXAMPLE: LSTCOL 40,,,,,20,20 ; Reset label, X, and Y data field widths MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL 6-63 Assembler Significant Characters And Directives Assembler Directives MACLIB Macro Library MACLIB 6-64 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Assembler Significant Characters And Directives Assembler Directives MACRO Macro Definition The dummy argument list has the form: [ Chapter 5 contains a complete description of macros. See also: DUP, DUPA, DUPC, DUPF, ENDM EXAMPLE: SWAP_SYM MACRO REG1,REG2 ;swap REG1,REG2 using X0 as temp MOVE R\?REG1,X0 MOVE R\?REG2,R\?REG1 MOVE X0,R\?REG2 ENDM MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL 6-65 Assembler Significant Characters And Directives Assembler Directives MODE Change Relocation Mode MODE 6-66 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Assembler Significant Characters And Directives Assembler Directives MSG Programmer Generated Message MSG [{ MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL 6-67 Assembler Significant Characters And Directives Assembler Directives NOLIST Stop Assembly Listing NOLIST Do not print the listing from this point on (including the NOLIST directive). Subsequent source lines will not be printed. The NOLIST directive actually decrements a counter that is checked for a positive value and is symmetrical with respect to the LIST directive. Note the following sequence: ; Counter value currently 1 LIST ; Counter value = 2 LIST ; Counter value = 3 NOLIST ; Counter value = 2 NOLIST ; Counter value = 1 The listing still would not be disabled until another NOLIST directive was issued. A label is not allowed with this directive. See also: LIST, OPT EXAMPLE: IF LISTOFF NOLIST ; Turn the listing off ENDIF 6-68 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Assembler Significant Characters And Directives Assembler Directives OPT Assembler Options OPT The OPT directive is used to designate the Assembler options. Assembler options are giv- en in the operand field of the source input file and are separated by commas. Options also may be specified using the command line -O option (see Chapter 1). All options have a default condition. Some options are reset to their default condition at the end of pass one. Some are allowed to have the prefix NO attached to them, which then reverses their meaning. Options can be grouped by function into five different types: 1. Listing format control 2. Reporting options 3. Message control 4. Symbol options 5. Assembler operation Listing Format Control These options control the format of the listing file: FC - Fold trailing comments FF - Form feeds for page ejects FM - Format messages PP - Pretty print listing RC - Relative comment spacing MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL 6-69 Assembler Significant Characters And Directives Assembler Directives Reporting Options These options control what is reported in the listing file: CC - Enable cycle counts CEX - Print DC expansions CL - Print conditional assembly directives CM - Preserve comment lines within macros CONTC - Continue cycle counts CRE - Print symbol cross-reference DXL - Expand DEFINE directive strings in listing HDR - Generate listing headers IL - Inhibit source listing LOC - Print local labels in cross-reference MC - Print macro calls MD - Print macro definitions MEX - Print macro expansions MU - Print memory utilization report NL - Print conditional assembly and section nesting levels S - Print symbol table U - Print skipped conditional assembly lines Message Control These options control the types of Assembler messages that are generated: AE - Check address expressions IDW - Warn on pipeline stalls MSW - Warn on memory space incompatibilities NDE - Warn on DALU pipeline interlocks UR - Flag unresolved references W - Display warning messages 6-70 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Assembler Significant Characters And Directives Assembler Directives Symbol Options These options deal with the handling of symbols by the Assembler: CONST - Make EQU symbols assembly time constants DEX - Expand DEFINE symbols within quoted strings GL - Make all section symbols global GS - Make all sections global static IC - Ignore case in symbol names NS - Support symbol scoping in nested sections SCL - Scope structured control statement labels SCO - Structured control statement labels to listing/object file SMS - Preserve memory space in SET symbols SO - Write symbols to object file XLL - Write local labels to object file XR - Recognize XDEFed symbols without XREF Assembler Operation Miscellaneous options having to do with internal Assembler operation: AL - Align load counter in overlay buffers CK - Enable checksumming CONTCK - Continue checksumming DBL - Split dual read instructions DLD - Do not restrict directives in loops EM - Emulate 56100 instructions on the 56800 INTR - Perform interrupt location checks LB - Byte increment load counter LBX - Split load words into bytes LDB - Listing file debug MI - Scan MACLIB directories for include files PS - Pack strings PSB - Preserve sign bit in negative operands PSM - Programmable short addressing mode RP - Generate NOP to accommodate pipeline delay RSV - Check reserve data memory locations SBM - Sixteen bit mode support SI - Interpret short immediate as long or sign extended SVO - Preserve object file on errors MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL 6-71 Assembler Significant Characters And Directives Assembler Directives Following are descriptions of the individual options. The parenthetical inserts specify de- fault if the option is the default condition, and reset if the option is reset to its default state at the end of pass one. A label is not allowed with this directive. AE (default, reset) Check address expressions for appropriate arithmetic opera- tions. For example, this will check that only valid add or subtract operations are performed on address terms. AL (default, reset) Align load counter in overlay buffers. CC Enable cycle counts and clear total cycle count. Cycle counts will be shown on the output listing for each instruction. Cycle counts assume a full instruc- tion fetch pipeline and no wait states. CEX Print DC expansions. CK Enable checksumming of instruction and data values and clear cumulative checksum. The checksum value can be obtained using the @CHK() function (see Chapter 3). CL (default, reset) Print the conditional assembly directives. CM (default, reset) Preserve comment lines of macros when they are defined. Note that any comment line within a macro definition that starts with two con- secutive semicolons (;;) is never preserved in the macro definition. CONST EQU symbols are maintained as assembly time constants and will not be sent to the object file. CONTC Re-enable cycle counts. Does not clear total cycle counts. The cycle count for each instruction will be shown on the output listing. CONTCK Re-enable checksumming of instructions and data. Does not clear cumula- tive checksum value. CRE Print a cross reference table at the end of the source listing. This option, if used, must be specified before the first symbol in the source program is de- fined. DBL (DSP56800 only) Split dual read instructions. DEX Expand DEFINE symbols within quoted strings. Can also be done on a case- by-case basis using double-quoted strings. DLD Do not restrict directives in DO loops. The presence of some directives in DO loops does not make sense, including some OPT directive variations. This op- tion suppresses errors on particular directives in loops. DXL (default, reset) Expand DEFINE directive strings in listing. 6-72 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Assembler Significant Characters And Directives Assembler Directives EM (DSP56800 only) Used when it is necessary to emulate 56100 instructions. This option must be used in order to use the following 56100 instructions in the 56800 part: ASR16, IMAC, NEGW, TFR2, SUBL and SWAP. FC Fold trailing comments. Any trailing comments that are included in a source line will be folded underneath the source line and aligned with the opcode field. Lines that start with the comment character will be aligned with the label field in the source listing. The FC option is useful for displaying the source listing on 80 column devices. FF Use form feeds for page ejects in the listing file. FM Format Assembler messages so that the message text is aligned and broken at word boundaries. GL Make all section symbols global. This has the same effect as declaring every section explicitly GLOBAL. This option must be given before any sections are defined explicitly in the source file. GS (default, reset in absolute mode) Make all sections global static. All section counters and attributes will be associated with the GLOBAL section. This op- tion must be given before any sections are defined explicitly in the source file. HDR (default, reset) Generate listing header along with titles and subtitles. IC Ignore case in symbol, section, and macro names. This directive must be is- sued before any symbols, sections, or macros are defined. IDW (DSP56300 only) (default, reset) Generate warning on instruction delays due to pipeline stalls. IL Inhibit source listing. This option will stop the Assembler from producing a source listing. INTR (default, reset in absolute mode) Perform interrupt location checks. Certain DSP instructions may not appear in the interrupt vector locations in program memory. This option enables the Assembler to check for these instructions when the program counter is within the interrupt vector bounds. LB Increment load counter (if different from runtime) by number of bytes in DSP word to provide byte-wide support for overlays in bootstrap mode. This option must appear before any code or data generation. LBX Split overlay load words into bytes and increment load counter by bytes. This option facilitates debugging of custom boot code. It must appear prior to any code or data generation. LDB Use the listing file as the debug source file rather than the assembly language file. The -L command line option to generate a listing file must be specified for this option to take effect. MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL 6-73 Assembler Significant Characters And Directives Assembler Directives LOC Include local labels in the symbol table and cross-reference listing. Local la- bels are not normally included in these listings. If neither the S or CRE options are specified, then this option has no effect. The LOC option must be speci- fied before the first symbol is encountered in the source file. MC (default, reset) Print macro calls. MD (default, reset) Print macro definitions. MEX Print macro expansions. MI Scan MACLIB directory paths for include files. The Assembler ordinarily looks for included files only in the directory specified in the INCLUDE directory or in the paths given by the -I command line option. If the MI option is used the Assembler will also look for included files in any designated MACLIB di- rectories. MSW (default, reset) Issue warning on memory space incompatibilities. MU Include a memory utilization report in the source listing. This option must ap- pear before any code or data generation. NDE (DSP56300 only) (default, reset) This is used to check for DALU pipeline in- terlocks. It flags all interlocks that occur as a result of using the accumulator register as a destination in previous instructions. NL Display conditional assembly (IF-ELSE-ENDIF) and section nesting levels on listing. NOAE Do not check address expressions. NOAL Do not align load counter in overlay buffers. NOCC (default, reset) Disable cycle counts. Does not clear total cycle count. NOCEX (default, reset) Do not print DC expansions. NOCK (default, reset) Disable checksumming of instruction and data values. NOCL Do not print the conditional assembly directives. NOCM Do not preserve comment lines of macros when they are defined. NOCONST (default, reset) EQU symbols are exported to the object file. NODBL (DSP56800 only) (default, reset) Do not split dual read instructions. NODEX (default, reset) Do not expand DEFINE symbols within quoted strings. NODLD (default, reset) Restrict use of certain directives in DO loop. NODXL Do not expand DEFINE directive strings in listing. 6-74 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Assembler Significant Characters And Directives Assembler Directives NOEM (DSP56800 only) (default, reset) Do not emulate 56100 instructions. NOFC (default, reset) Inhibit folded comments. NOFF (default, reset) Use multiple line feeds for page ejects in the listing file. NOFM (default, reset) Do not format Assembler messages. NOGS (default, reset in relative mode) Do not make all sections global static. NOHDR Do not generate listing header. This also turns off titles and subtitles. NOIDW (DSP56300 only) Do not generate warnings on pipeline stalls. NOINTR (default, reset in relative mode) Do not perform interrupt location checks. NOMC Do not print macro calls. NOMD Do not print macro definitions. NOMEX (default, reset) Do not print macro expansions. NOMI (default, reset) Do not scan MACLIB directory paths for include files. NOMSW Do not issue warning on memory space incompatibilities. NONDE (DSP56300 only) Do not flag DALU pipeline interlocks. NONL (default, reset) Do not display nesting levels on listing. NONS Do not allow scoping of symbols within nested sections. NOPP Do not pretty print listing file. Source lines are sent to the listing file as they are encountered in the source, with the exception that tabs are expanded to spaces and continuation lines are concatenated into a single physical line for printing. NOPS Do not pack strings in DC directive. Individual bytes in strings will be stored one byte per word. NOPSB Do not preserve sign bit in twos-complement negative operands. NOPSM (DSP56166 only) (default, reset) Do not allow programmable short address- ing. NORC (default, reset) Do not space comments relatively. NORP (default, reset) Do not generate instructions to accommodate pipeline delay. NORSV (DSP96000 only) (default, reset) Do not perform reserve memory checks. NOSCL Do not maintain the current local label scope when a structured control state- ment label is encountered. MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL 6-75 Assembler Significant Characters And Directives Assembler Directives NOSI (DSP56000 only) (default, reset) Interpret an eight-bit short immediate value moved to a fractional register as a short unless forced long. (DSP56100 only) (default, reset) Do not interpret eighth bit of short immediate value as implied sign extension. NOSMS Do not preserve memory space in SET symbols. NOU (default, reset) Do not print the lines excluded from the assembly due to a con- ditional assembly directive. NOUR (default, reset) Do not flag unresolved external references. NOW Do not print warning messages. NS (default, reset) Allow scoping of symbols within nested sections. PP (default, reset) Pretty print listing file. The Assembler attempts to align fields at a consistent column position without regard to source file formatting. PS (default, reset) Pack strings in DC directive. Individual bytes in strings will be packed into consecutive target words for the length of the string. PSB (default, reset) Preserve sign bit in twos-complement negative operands. PSM (DSP56100 only) Allow programmable short addressing, disabling short and I/O short address checking. RC Space comments relatively in listing fields. By default, the Assembler always places comments at a consistent column position in the listing file. This option allows the comment field to float: on a line containing only a label and opcode, the comment would begin in the operand field. RP Generate NOP instructions to accommodate pipeline delay. If an address register is loaded in one instruction then the contents of the register is not available for use as a pointer until after the next instruction. Ordinarily when the Assembler detects this condition it issues an error message. The RP op- tion will cause the Assembler to output a NOP instruction into the output stream instead of issuing an error. RSV (DSP96000 only) Perform location counter checks to insure code/data is not located in DSP96000 reserve data memory locations. The Assembler will is- sue a warning if the program counter value falls within the reserved range. S Print symbol table at the end of the source listing. This option has no effect if the CRE option is used. SBM (DSP56300 only) Supports 16 bit mode operation for the 56300 when used in such a mode. This option ensures that in evaluations of fractional values the 6-76 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Assembler Significant Characters And Directives Assembler Directives upper 16 bits are considered rather than the lower 16 bits. Not using this op- tion does not preclude the use of the 16 bit mode in the 56300. SCL (default, reset) Structured control statements generate non-local labels that ordinarily are not visible to the programmer. This can create problems when local labels are interspersed among structured control statements. This op- tion causes the Assembler to maintain the current local label scope when a structured control statement label is encountered. SCO Send structured control statement labels to object and listing files. Normally the Assembler does not externalize these labels. This option must appear be- fore any symbol definition. SI (DSP56000 only) Interpret an eight-bit short immediate value moved to a frac- tional register as a long unless forced short. (DSP56100 only) Interpret eighth bit of short immediate as implied sign exten- sion. SMS (default, reset) Preserve memory space in SET symbols. SO Write symbol information to object file. This option is recognized but performs no operation in COFF Assemblers. SVO Preserve object file on errors. Normally any object file produced by the As- sembler is deleted if errors occur during assembly. This option must be given before any code or data is generated. U Print the unassembled lines skipped due to failure to satisfy the condition of a conditional assembly directive. UR Generate a warning at assembly time for each unresolved external reference. This option works only in relocatable mode. W (default, reset) Print all warning messages. WEX Add warning count to exit status. Ordinarily the Assembler exits with a count of errors. This option causes the count of warnings to be added to the error count. XLL Write underscore local labels to object file. This is primarily used to aid de- bugging. This option, if used, must be specified before the first symbol in the source program is defined. MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL 6-77 Assembler Significant Characters And Directives Assembler Directives XR Causes XDEFed symbols to be recognized within other sections without be- ing XREFed. This option, if used, must be specified before the first symbol in the source program is encountered. EXAMPLE: OPT CEX,MEX ; Turn on DC and macro expansions OPT CRE,MU ; Cross reference, memory utilization 6-78 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Assembler Significant Characters And Directives Assembler Directives ORG Initialize Memory Space and Location Counters ORG ORG The ORG directive is used to specify addresses and to indicate memory space and map- ping changes. It also can designate an implicit counter mode switch in the Assembler and serves as a mechanism for initiating overlays. A label is not allowed with this directive. Non-negative absolute integer expression representing the counter number to be used as the runtime location counter. Must be enclosed in parenthe- ses. Should not exceed the value 65535. MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL 6-79 Assembler Significant Characters And Directives Assembler Directives 6-80 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Assembler Significant Characters And Directives Assembler Directives location counter expression. This expression, if relative, may not refer to another overlay block. See also: MODE EXAMPLES: ORG P:$1000 Sets the runtime memory space to P. Selects the default runtime counter (counter 0) associated with P space to use as the runtime location counter and initializes it to $1000. The load memory space is implied to be P, and the load location counter is assumed to be the same as the runtime location counter. ORG PHE: Sets the runtime memory space to P. Selects the H load counter (counter 2) as- sociated with P space to use as the runtime location counter. The H counter will not be initialized, and its last value will be used. Code generated hereafter will be mapped to external (E) memory. The load memory space is implied to be P, and the load location counter is assumed to be the same as the runtime location counter. ORG PI:OVL1,Y: Indicates code will be generated for an overlay. The runtime memory space is P, and the default counter is used as the runtime location counter. It will be reset to the value of OVL1. If the Assembler is in absolute mode via the -A command line option then OVL1 must be an absolute expression. If OVL1 is an absolute expres- sion the Assembler uses the absolute runtime location counter. If OVL1 is a relo- catable value the Assembler uses the relative runtime location counter. In this case OVL1 must not itself be an overlay symbol (e.g. defined within an overlay block). The load memory space is Y. Since neither H, L, nor any counter expression was specified as the load counter, the default load counter (counter 0) will be used as the load location counter. The counter value and mode will be whatever it was the last time it was referenced. ORG XL:,E8: Sets the runtime memory space to X. Selects the L counter (counter 1) associated with X space to use as the runtime location counter. The L counter will not be ini- tialized, and its last value will be used. The load memory space is set to E, and the qualifier 8 indicates a bytewise RAM configuration. Instructions and data will be generated eight bits per output word with byte-oriented load addresses. The de- fault load counter will be used and there is no explicit load origin. MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL 6-81 Assembler Significant Characters And Directives Assembler Directives ORG P(5):,Y:$8000 Indicates code will be generated for an absolute overlay. The runtime memory space is P, and the counter used as the runtime location counter is counter 5. It will not be initialized, and the last previous value of counter 5 will be used. The load memory space is Y. Since neither H, L, nor any counter expression was specified as the load counter, the default load counter (counter 0) will be used as the load location counter. The default load counter will be initialized to $8000. 6-82 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Assembler Significant Characters And Directives Assembler Directives PAGE Top of Page/Size Page PAGE [ BLANK_BOTTOM MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL 6-83 Assembler Significant Characters And Directives Assembler Directives The following relationships must be maintained: BLANK_TOP + BLANK_BOTTOM <= PAGE_LENGTH - 10 BLANK_LEFT < PAGE_WIDTH See also: LSTCOL EXAMPLE: PAGE 132,,3,3 ; Set width to132, 3 line top/bottom margins PAGE ; Page eject 6-84 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Assembler Significant Characters And Directives Assembler Directives PMACRO Purge Macro Definition PMACRO This statement would cause the macros named MAC1 and MAC2 to be purged. MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL 6-85 Assembler Significant Characters And Directives Assembler Directives PRCTL Send Control String to Printer PRCTL 6-86 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Assembler Significant Characters And Directives Assembler Directives RADIX Change Input Radix for Constants RADIX MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL 6-87 Assembler Significant Characters And Directives Assembler Directives RDIRECT Remove Directive or Mnemonic from Table RDIRECT This would cause the Assembler to remove the PAGE directive from the directive table and the MOVE mnemonic from the mnemonic table. 6-88 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Assembler Significant Characters And Directives Assembler Directives SCSJMP Set Structured Control Statement Branching Mode SCSJMP {SHORT | LONG | NONE} The SCSJMP directive is analogous to the FORCE directive, but it only applies to branch- es generated automatically by structured control statements (see Chapter 7). There is no explicit way, as with a forcing operator, to force a branch short or long when it is produced by a structured control statement. This directive will cause all branches resulting from sub- sequent structured control statements to be forced to the specified mode. Just like the FORCE pseudo-op, errors can result if a value is too large to be forced short. For relocatable code, the error may not occur until the linking phase. See also: FORCE, SCSREG A label is not allowed with this directive. EXAMPLE: SCSJMP SHORT ; force all subsequent SCS jumps short MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL 6-89 Assembler Significant Characters And Directives Assembler Directives SCSREG Reassign Structured Control Statement Registers SCSREG [ 6-90 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Assembler Significant Characters And Directives Assembler Directives SECTION Start Section SECTION MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL 6-91 Assembler Significant Characters And Directives Assembler Directives The division of a program into sections controls not only labels and symbols, but also mac- ros and DEFINE directive symbols. Macros defined within a section are private to that section and are distinct from macros defined in other sections even if they have the same macro name. Macros defined outside of sections are considered global and may be used within any section. Similarly, DEFINE directive symbols defined within a section are pri- vate to that section and DEFINE directive symbols defined outside of any section are glo- bally applied. There are no directives that correspond to XDEF for macros or DEFINE symbols, and therefore, macros and DEFINE symbols defined in a section can never be accessed globally. If global accessibility is desired, the macros and DEFINE symbols should be defined outside of any section. Sections can be nested to any level. When the Assembler encounters a nested section, the current section is stacked and the new section is used. When the ENDSEC directive of the nested section is encountered, the Assembler restores the old section and uses it. The ENDSEC directive always applies to the most previous SECTION directive. Nesting sections provides a measure of scoping for symbol names, in that symbols defined within a given section are visible to other sections nested within it. For example, if section B is nested inside section A, then a symbol defined in section A can be used in section B with- out XDEFing in section A or XREFing in section B. This scoping behavior can be turned off and on with the NONS and NS options respectively (see the OPT directive, this chap- ter). Sections may also be split into separate parts. That is, 6-92 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Assembler Significant Characters And Directives Assembler Directives a section may be made absolute either implicitly by using the ORG directive, or explicitly through use of the MODE directive. A label is not allowed with this directive. See also: MODE, ORG, GLOBAL, LOCAL, XDEF, XREF EXAMPLE: SECTION TABLES ; TABLES will be the section name MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL 6-93 Assembler Significant Characters And Directives Assembler Directives SET Set Symbol to a Value 6-94 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Assembler Significant Characters And Directives Assembler Directives STITLE Initialize Program Sub-Title STITLE [ MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL 6-95 Assembler Significant Characters And Directives Assembler Directives SYMOBJ Write Symbol Information to Object File SYMOBJ 6-96 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Assembler Significant Characters And Directives Assembler Directives TABS Set Listing Tab Stops TABS MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL 6-97 Assembler Significant Characters And Directives Assembler Directives TITLE Initialize Program Title TITLE [ 6-98 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Assembler Significant Characters And Directives Assembler Directives UNDEF Undefine DEFINE Symbol UNDEF [ MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL 6-99 Assembler Significant Characters And Directives Assembler Directives WARN Programmer Generated Warning WARN [{ 6-100 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Assembler Significant Characters And Directives Assembler Directives XDEF External Section Symbol Definition XDEF MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL 6-101 Assembler Significant Characters And Directives Assembler Directives XREF External Section Symbol Reference XREF 6-102 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Chapter 7 STRUCTURED CONTROL STATEMENTS 7.1 INTRODUCTION An assembly language provides an instruction set for performing certain rudimentary op- erations. These operations in turn may be combined into control structures such as loops (FOR, REPEAT, WHILE) or conditional branches (IF-THEN, IF-THEN-ELSE). The As- sembler, however, accepts formal, high-level directives that specify these control struc- tures, generating the appropriate assembly language instructions for their efficient implementation. This use of structured control statement directives improves the read- ability of assembly language programs, without compromising the desirable aspects of programming in an assembly language. 7.2 STRUCTURED CONTROL DIRECTIVES The following directives are used for structured control. Note the leading period, which distinguishes these keywords from other directives and mnemonics. Structured control directives may be specified in either upper or lower case, but they must appear in the op- code field of the instruction line (e.g. they must be preceded either by a label, a space, or a tab). .BREAK .ENDI .LOOP .CONTINUE .ENDL .REPEAT .ELSE .ENDW .UNTIL .ENDF .FOR .WHILE .IF In addition, the following keywords are used in structured control statements: AND DOWNTO TO BY OR DO THEN Note that AND, DO, and OR are reserved Assembler instruction mnemonics. MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL 7-1 Structured Control Statements Syntax 7.3 SYNTAX The formats for the .BREAK, .CONTINUE, .FOR, .IF, .LOOP, .REPEAT, and .WHILE statements are given in sections 7.3.4 through 7.3.2. Syntactic variables used in the for- mats are defined as follows: 7.3.1 .BREAK Statement SYNTAX: .BREAK [ 7-2 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Structured Control Statements Syntax FUNCTION: The .BREAK statement causes an immediate exit from the innermost en- closing loop construct (.WHILE, .REPEAT, .FOR, .LOOP). If the optional 7.3.2 .CONTINUE Statement SYNTAX: .CONTINUE FUNCTION: The .CONTINUE statement causes the next iteration of a looping construct (.WHILE, .REPEAT, .FOR, .LOOP) to begin. This means that the loop ex- pression or operand comparison is performed immediately, bypassing any subsequent instructions. MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL 7-3 Structured Control Statements Syntax NOTES: If a .CONTINUE is encountered with no loop statement active, a warning is issued. .CONTINUE should be used with care near .ENDL directives or near the end of DO loops. It generates a jump instruction which is illegal in those contexts. One or more .CONTINUE directives inside a .LOOP construct will generate a NOP instruction just before the loop address. EXAMPLE: .REPEAT . . . .IF 7.3.3 .FOR Statement SYNTAX: .FOR .ENDF FUNCTION: Initialize 7-4 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Structured Control Statements Syntax NOTES: 7.3.4 .IF Statement SYNTAX: .IF FUNCTION: If MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL 7-5 Structured Control Statements Syntax NOTES: In the case of nested .IF-THEN-.ELSE statements, each .ELSE refers to the most recent .IF-THEN sequence. EXAMPLE: .IF 7.3.5 .LOOP Statement SYNAX: .LOOP [ FUNCTION: Execute One or more .CONTINUE directives inside a .LOOP construct will generate a NOP instruction just before the loop address. if 7-6 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Structured Control Statements Syntax 7.3.6 .REPEAT Statement SYNTAX: .REPEAT FUNCTION: 7.3.7 .WHILE Statement SYNTAX: .WHILE .ENDW FUNCTION: The MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL 7-7 Structured Control Statements Simple And Compound Expressions The DO keyword is optional. EXAMPLE: .WHILE x:(r1)+ 7.4 SIMPLE AND COMPOUND EXPRESSIONS Expressions are an integral part of .IF, .REPEAT, and .WHILE statements. Structured control statement expressions should not be confused with the Assembler expressions discussed in Chapter 3. The latter are evaluated at assembly time and will be referred to here as "Assembler expressions"; they can serve as operands in structured control state- ment expressions. The structured control statement expressions described below are evaluated at run time and will be referred to in the following discussion simply as "expres- sions". A structured control statement expression may be simple or compound. A compound ex- pression consists of two or more simple expressions joined by either AND or OR (but not both in a single compound expression). 7.4.1 Simple Expressions Simple expressions are concerned with the bits of the Condition Code Register (CCR). These expressions are of two types. The first type merely tests conditions currently spec- ified by the contents of the CCR (section 7.4.1.1). The second type sets up a comparison of two operands to set the condition codes, and afterwards tests the codes (section 7.4.1.2). 7.4.1.1 Condition Code Expressions A variety of tests (identical to those in the Jcc instruction) may be performed, based on the CCR condition codes. The condition codes, in this case, are preset by either a user- generated instruction or a structured operand-comparison expression (section 7.4.1.2). Each test is expressed in the structured control statement by a mnemonic enclosed in an- gle brackets; the mnemonics are described in Appendix F, Condition Code Mnemonics. 7-8 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Structured Control Statements Simple And Compound Expressions When processed by the Assembler, the expression generates an inverse conditional jump to beyond the matching .ENDx/.UNTIL directive. For example: .IF 7.4.1.2 Operand Comparison Expressions Two operands may be compared in a simple expression, with subsequent transfer of con- trol based on that comparison. Such a comparison takes the form: MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL 7-9 Structured Control Statements Statement Formatting Note that values in the 7.4.2 Compound Expressions A compound expression consists of two or more simple expressions (section 7.4.1) joined by a logical operator (AND or OR). The boolean value of the compound expression is de- termined by the boolean values of the simple expressions and the nature of the logical operator. Note that the result of mixing logical operators in a compound expression is un- defined: .IF X1 The simple expressions are evaluated left to right. Note that this means the result of one simple expression could have an impact on the result of subsequent simple expressions, because of the condition code settings stemming from the Assembler-generated com- pare. If the compound expression is an AND expression and one of the simple expressions is found to be false, any further simple expressions are not evaluated. Likewise, if the com- pound expression is an OR expression and one of the simple expressions is found to be true, any further simple expressions are not evaluated. In these cases, the compound ex- pression is either false or true, respectively, and the condition codes reflect the result of the last simple expression evaluated. 7.5 STATEMENT FORMATTING The format of structured control statements differs somewhat from normal Assembler us- age. Whereas a standard Assembler line is split into fields separated by blanks or tabs, with no white space inside the fields, structured control statement formats vary depending on the statement being analyzed. In general, all structured control directives are placed in the opcode field (with an optional label in the label field) and white space separates all distinct fields in the statement. Any structured control statement may be followed by a comment on the same logical line. 7.5.1 Expression Formatting Given an expression of the form: 7-10 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Structured Control Statements Effects On The Programmer’s Environment there must be white space (blank, tab) between all operands and their associated opera- tors, including boolean operators in compound expressions. Moreover, there must be white space between the structured control directive and the expression, and between the expression and any optional directive modifier (THEN, DO). An Assembler expression (Chapter 3) used as an operand in a structured control statement expression must not have white space in it, since it is parsed by the standard Assembler evaluation routines: .IF #@CVI(@SQT(4.0)) 7.5.2 .FOR/.LOOP Formatting The .FOR and .LOOP directives represent special cases. The .FOR structured control statement consists of several fields: .FOR There must be white space between all operands and other syntactic entities such as =, TO, BY, and DO. As with expression formatting, an Assembler expression used as an operand must not have white space in it: .FOR X:CNT = #0 TO Y:(targ*2)+1 BY #@CVI(@POW(2.0,@CVF(R))) In the example above, the .FOR loop operands represented as Assembler expressions (symbol, function) do not have embedded white space, whereas the loop operands are always separated from structured control statement keywords by white space. The count field of a .LOOP statement must be separated from the .LOOP directive by white space. The count itself may be any arbitrary Assembler expression, and therefore must not contain embedded blanks. 7.5.3 Assembly Listing Format Structured control statements begin with the directive in the opcode field; any optional la- bel is output in the label field. The rest of the statement is left as is in the operand field, except for any trailing comment; the X and Y data movement fields are ignored. Com- ments following the statement are output in the comment field (unless the unreported comment delimiter is used; see Chapter 6). Statements are expanded using the macro facilities of the Assembler. Thus the generated code can be sent to the listing by specifying the MEX Assembler option, either via the OPT directive (Chapter 6) or the -O command line option (Chapter 1). 7.6 EFFECTS ON THE PROGRAMMER’S ENVIRONMENT During assembly, global labels beginning with "Z_L" are generated. They are stored in the symbol table and should not be duplicated in user-defined labels. Because these non-lo- cal labels ordinarily are not visible to the programmer there can be problems when local MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL 7-11 Structured Control Statements Effects On The Programmer’s Environment (underscore) labels are interspersed among structured control statements. The SCL op- tion (see the OPT directive, Chapter 6) causes the Assembler to maintain the current local label scope when a structured control statement label is encountered. In the .FOR loop, 7-12 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Appendix A ASCII CHARACTER CODES DecimalHex ASCII DecimalHex ASCII 0 00 NUL 64 40 @ 1 01 SOH 65 41 A 2 02 STX 66 42 B 3 03 ETX 67 43 C 4 04 EOT 68 44 D 5 05 ENQ 69 45 E 6 06 ACK 70 46 F 7 07 BEL 71 47 G 808BS7248H 909HT7349I 10 0A LF 74 4A J 11 0B VT 75 4B K 12 0C FF 76 4C L 13 0D CR 77 4D M 14 0E S0 78 4E N 15 0F S1 79 4F O 16 10 DLW 80 50 P 17 11 DC1 81 51 Q 18 12 DC2 82 52 R 19 13 DC3 83 53 S 20 14 DC4 84 54 T 21 15 NAK 85 55 U 22 16 SYN 86 56 V 23 17 ETB 87 57 W 24 18 CAN 88 58 X 25 19 EM 89 59 Y 26 1A SUB 90 5A Z 27 1B ESC 91 5B [ 28 1C FS 92 5C \ MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL A-1 ASCII Character Codes DecimalHex ASCII DecimalHex ASCII 29 1D GS 93 5D ] 30 1E RS 94 5E ^ 31 1F US 95 5F _ 32 20 SP 96 60 ‘ 33 21 ! 97 61 a 34 22 " 98 62 b 35 23 # 99 63 c 36 24 $ 100 64 d 37 25 % 101 65 e 38 26 & 102 66 f 39 27 ’ 103 67 g 40 28 ( 104 68 h 41 29 ) 105 69 i 42 2A * 106 6A j 43 2B + 107 6B k 44 2C , 108 6C l 45 2D - 109 6D m 46 2E . 110 6E n 47 2F / 111 6F o 48 30 0 112 70 p 49 31 1 113 71 q 50 32 2 114 72 r 51 33 3 115 73 s 52 34 4 116 74 t 53 35 5 117 75 u 54 36 6 118 76 v 55 37 7 119 77 w 56 38 8 120 78 x 57 39 9 121 79 y 58 3A : 122 7A z 59 3B ; 123 7B { 60 3C < 124 7C | 61 3D = 125 7D } 62 3E > 126 7E ~ 63 3F ? 127 7F DEL A-2 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Appendix B DIRECTIVE SUMMARY Assembler directives can be grouped by function into seven types: 1. Assembly control 2. Symbol definition 3. Data definition/storage allocation 4. Listing control and options 5. Object file control 6. Macros and conditional assembly 7. Structured programming B.1 ASSEMBLY CONTROL The directives used for assembly control are: COMMENT - Start comment lines DEFINE - Define substitution string END - End of source program FAIL - Programmer generated error message FORCE - Set operand forcing mode HIMEM - Set high memory bounds INCLUDE - Include secondary file LOMEM - Set low memory bounds MODE - Change relocation mode MSG - Programmer generated message ORG - Initialize memory space and location counters RADIX - Change input radix for constants RDIRECT - Remove directive or mnemonic from table SCSJMP - Set structured control branching mode SCSREG - Reassign structured control statement registers UNDEF - Undefine DEFINE symbol WARN - Programmer generated warning MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL B-1 Directive Summary Symbol Definition B.2 SYMBOL DEFINITION The directives used to control symbol definition are: ENDSEC - End section EQU - Equate symbol to a value GLOBAL - Global section symbol declaration GSET - Set global symbol to a value LOCAL - Local section symbol declaration SECTION - Start section SET - Set symbol to a value XDEF - External section symbol definition XREF - External section symbol reference B.3 DATA DEFINITION/STORAGE ALLOCATION The directives used to control constant data definition and storage allocation are: BADDR - Set buffer address BSB - Block storage bit-reverse BSC - Block storage of constant BSM - Block storage modulo BUFFER - Start buffer DC - Define constant DCB - Define constant byte DS - Define storage DSM - Define modulo storage DSR - Define reverse carry storage ENDBUF - End buffer B.4 LISTING CONTROL AND OPTIONS The directives used to control the output listing are: LIST - List the assembly LSTCOL - Set listing field widths NOLIST - Stop assembly listing OPT - Assembler options PAGE - Top of page/size page PRCTL - Send control string to printer STITLE - Initialize program subtitle TABS - Set listing tab stops TITLE - Initialize program title B-2 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Directive Summary Object File Control B.5 OBJECT FILE CONTROL The directives used for control of the object file are: COBJ - Comment object code IDENT - Object code identification record SYMOBJ - Write symbol information to object file B.6 MACROS AND CONDITIONAL ASSEMBLY The directives used for macros and conditional assembly are: DUP - Duplicate sequence of source lines DUPA - Duplicate sequence with arguments DUPC - Duplicate sequence with characters DUPF - Duplicate sequence in loop ENDIF - End of conditional assembly ENDM - End of macro definition EXITM - Exit macro IF - Conditional assembly directive MACLIB - Macro library MACRO - Macro definition PMACRO - Purge macro definition B.7 STRUCTURED PROGRAMMING The directives used for structured programming are: .BREAK - Exit from structured loop construct .CONTINUE - Continue next iteration of structured loop .ELSE - Perform following statements when .IF false .ENDF - End of .FOR loop .ENDI - End of .IF condition .ENDL - End of hardware loop .ENDW - End of .WHILE loop .FOR - Begin .FOR loop .IF - Begin .IF condition .LOOP - Begin hardware loop .REPEAT - Begin .REPEAT loop .UNTIL - End of .REPEAT loop .WHILE - Begin .WHILE loop MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL B-3 Appendix C ASSEMBLER MESSAGES C.1 INTRODUCTION Assembler messages are grouped into four categories: Command Line Errors These errors indicate invalid command line options, missing filenames, file open errors, or other invocation errors. Command line errors generally cause the As- sembler to stop processing. Warnings Warnings notify the programmer of suspect constructs but do not otherwise affect the object file output. Errors These errors indicate problems with syntax, addressing modes, or usage. In these cases the resulting object code is generally not valid. Fatal Fatal errors signify serious problems encountered during the assembly process such as lack of memory, file not found, or other internal errors. The Assembler halts immediately. The Assembler also will provide information on the source field location of the error, if it can be ascertained. If a listing file is produced, messages ordinarily will appear immedi- ately before the line containing the error. One exception is when the relationship between the first and last instructions in a DO loop produces an error. In this case the error text will appear after the last instruction at the end of the loop. Messages are always routed to standard output. MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL C-1 Assembler Messages Command Line Errors C.2 COMMAND LINE ERRORS Cannot open command file Cannot open listing file Cannot open object file The file associated with a -F, -L, or -B command line option was not found. Cannot open source file The assembly source input file was not found. Duplicate listing file specified - ignored Duplicate object file specified - ignored The -L and -B command line options were encountered more than once on the command line. Only the first occurrence of each option is used. The Assembler continues processing. Illegal command line -D option argument The symbol name given in a -D command line option is invalid (possibly too long or does not begin with an alphabetic character), or the substitution string is not en- closed in single quotes. Illegal command line -E option Neither of the qualifiers -A or -W were provided with the -E option. Illegal command line -I option argument A problem occurred when attempting to save the include file path string. Illegal command line -M option argument A problem occurred when attempting to save the MACLIB file path string. Illegal command line -P option argument The string provided as the processor type is not valid. Illegal command line -R option argument The string provided as the revision level is not valid. Illegal command line option The option specified on the command line was not recognized by the Assembler. Interrupted The Assembler was interrupted by a keyboard break (Control-C). C-2 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Assembler Messages Command Line Errors Invalid syntax for command line -E option There must be whitespace between the -E option and its filename argument. LDB option with no listing file specified; using source file The LDB option was given on the command line without a corresponding -L to gen- erate a listing file. If a listing file is not produced, debugging packages cannot use it for source tracking. Therefore the Assembler uses the default assembly lan- guage file as input for source tracking. Missing argument for command line -E option The -E command line option must have a filename argument. Missing command line option argument The expected arguments following a command line option specifier were missing. Missing source filename There must be at least one source filename specified on the command line. Source file name same as listing file name Source file name same as object file name One of the source files appeared to the Assembler to have the same name as the specified listing or object file. The Assembler aborts rather than potentially writing over a source input file. Strip not valid in relocatable mode - ignored The -Z option is not valid without the -A command line option. MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL C-3 Assembler Messages Warnings C.3 WARNINGS Absolute address involves incompatible memory spaces The memory space attribute is regarded by the Assembler as a type, in the same sense that high level languages use type for variables. Symbols may have memory space attributes of X, Y, L, P(rogram), E(MI), or N(one); only N is fully compatible with all other attributes. In this case, an operand was evaluated with a different memory space attribute than that specified in the instruction. Absolute address too large to use I/O short - long substituted The absolute address is not within the range specifying an I/O short address, even though the I/O short forcing operator has been used. The Assembler substitutes long absolute addressing. Absolute address too large to use short - long substituted The absolute address value being forced short will not fit in the storage allocated for a short address. The Assembler substitutes long absolute addressing. Absolute address too small to use I/O short - long substituted The absolute address is not within the range specifying an I/O short address, even though the I/O short forcing operator has been used. The Assembler substitutes long absolute addressing. Address involves incompatible memory spaces The memory space attribute is regarded by the Assembler as a type, in the same sense that high level languages use type for variables. Symbols may have memory space attributes of X, Y, L, P(rogram), E(MI), or N(one); only N is fully compatible with all other attributes. In this case, an operand was evaluated with a different memory space attribute than that specified in the instruction. Cannot force short addressing for source and destination In a MOVEP or MOVES instruction an attempt was made to force both operands to short or I/O short. The second operand defaults to long. Cannot force short immediate with this parallel move The immediate operand in the X field of a parallel X memory and register move cannot be forced short. The mode is changed to long immediate. Contents of assigned register in previous instruction not available - generating NOP instruction Due to pipelining, if an address register (Rn or Nn) is changed in the previous in- struction, the new contents are not available for use as a pointer until the next in- struction. If the RP option is in effect (see the OPT directive, Chapter 6) the C-4 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Assembler Messages Warnings Assembler produces this warning and generates a NOP prior to the offending in- struction. Debug directives ignored - use command line debug option A source-level debug directive was encountered but the Assembler command line -G option was not given. Destination operand assumed I/O short Neither operand in a MOVEP instruction is explicitly declared I/O short; however, the source operand does not qualify, so the destination operand is assumed to be the I/O short operand. Directive not allowed in command line absolute mode The MODE directive is ignored when the Assembler command line -A option is ac- tive. Displacement too large to use short - long substituted Short displacement addressing is not valid for this operation. The Assembler sub- stitutes long displacement addressing. Duplicate listing file specified - ignored Duplicate object file specified - ignored The -B or -L command line options were given more than once. EMI 8-bit memory value truncated EMI 12-bit memory value truncated EMI 16-bit memory value truncated EMI 20-bit memory value truncated The value in a data directive was too large for the current EMI memory configura- tion. ENDDO instruction not inside DO loop An ENDDO instruction was found outside the scope of an active DO loop. Explicit bottom margin ignored with page length of zero Explicit top margin ignored with page length of zero The top or bottom margin parameters to a PAGE directive are ignored because the page length parameter was zero. Expression involves incompatible memory spaces The memory space attribute is regarded by the Assembler as a type, in the same sense that high level languages use type for variables. Symbols may have memory MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL C-5 Assembler Messages Warnings space attributes of X, Y, L, P(rogram), E(MI), or N(one); only N is fully compatible with all other attributes. In this case, two operands were evaluated with different memory space attributes, neither of which was N. Expression value outside fractional domain The expected fractional value was not within the range -1.0 <= m < 1. Extra dimensions ignored A source-level debug .DIM directive contained more than four arguments specify- ing the dimensions of an array. FMPY suffix ignored - using secondary opcode suffix The single or extended precision suffix on a dual-opcode instruction has been ig- nored. The precision is taken from the suffix on the secondary opcode. Immediate value too large to use short - long substituted An immediate data value being forced short is too large to fit in the space allocated for a short immediate value. The Assembler substitutes long immediate address- ing. Improper nesting of DO loops The end address of a subordinate (nested) DO loop is greater than or equal to the end address of the loop enclosing it. The end address of a nested DO instruction must be less than the end address of the enclosing loop. Invalid register for short displacement addressing mode - long substituted The register specified in the displacement address cannot be used with the short form of the instruction. The Assembler substitutes long displacement addressing. Instruction cannot appear in interrupt vector locations Some instructions cannot be used reliably as interrupt code. These instructions in- clude RTI, RTS, DO, and ENDDO. Instruction does not allow data movement specified - using MOVE encoding Instruction does not allow data movement specified - using MOVEP encoding Instruction does not allow data movement specified - using MOVES encoding An inappropriate MOVE-type instruction was written given the type of the oper- ands. The Assembler substitutes a valid encoding for the operands in question. Invalid destination register for this instruction - using TFR3 encoding The destination register for a TFR2 instruction was not either X or Y. C-6 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Assembler Messages Warnings Invalid interrupt vector address - using SWI address Currently only the SWI address is supported by the TRAPcc instruction. I/O short absolute address cannot be forced I/O short absolute addressing is not valid for this operation. An appropriate ad- dressing mode (long absolute, short jump, short absolute) is substituted. I/O short absolute address cannot be forced - long substituted I/O short absolute addressing is not valid for this operation. The Assembler substi- tutes long absolute addressing. I/O short address cannot be forced I/O short addressing is not valid for this operation. An appropriate addressing mode (long, short, short jump) is substituted. I/O short address cannot be forced - long substituted I/O short addressing is not valid for this operation. The Assembler substitutes long addressing. Label field ignored The Assembler directive does not allow a label, so the Assembler will not store the label value in the symbol table. LDB option with no listing file specified; using source file The LDB option was given without an explicit -L command line option to create a listing file for debugging. Load location counter overflow Load location counter underflow The load location counter exceeded its maximum or minimum value. The Assem- bler wraps the counter value around and continues. Load origin involves incompatible memory spaces The memory space attribute is regarded by the Assembler as a type, in the same sense that high level languages use type for variables. Symbols may have memory space attributes of X, Y, L, P(rogram), E(MI), or N(one); only N is fully compatible with all other attributes. In this case, an operand was evaluated with a different memory space attribute than that specified in the directive. MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL C-7 Assembler Messages Warnings Load reserved address space violation The load location counter has incremented into a reserved area of data address space. Long absolute address cannot be forced Long absolute addressing is not valid for this operation. An appropriate addressing mode (I/O absolute, short jump, short absolute) is substituted. Long absolute address cannot be forced - substituting I/O short addressing Long absolute addressing is not valid for this operation. The Assembler substitutes I/O short addressing. Long absolute address cannot be forced - substituting short addressing Long absolute addressing is not valid for this operation. The Assembler substitutes short absolute addressing. Long displacement cannot be forced Long displacement addressing is not valid for this operation. An appropriate size for the target DSP is substituted. Long immediate cannot be forced Long immediate data is not valid for this operation. An appropriate size for the tar- get DSP is substituted. Long PC-relative address cannot be forced Long PC-relative addressing is not valid for this operation. An appropriate ad- dressing mode (short PC-relative) is substituted. Macro expansion not active A macro must have been called prior to using the @ARG() or @CNT() functions (see Chapter 3). Macro name is the same as existing Assembler directive Macro name is the same as existing Assembler mnemonic The name of the macro being defined conflicts with the name of an Assembler di- rective or mnemonic. Either use a different macro name or use the RDIRECT di- rective to remove the directive or mnemonic name from the Assembler lookup tables. C-8 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Assembler Messages Warnings No control registers accessed - using MOVE encoding A MOVEC-type instruction was given but no control registers were used as oper- ands. The Assembler substitutes a valid encoding for the operands in question. No looping construct found - .BREAK ignored No looping construct found - .CONTINUE ignored A .BREAK or .CONTINUE structure control statement was encountered outside of any active looping construct (.FOR, .LOOP, .REPEAT, .WHILE). Number of macro expansion arguments is greater than definition Number of macro expansion arguments is less than definition A discrepancy exists between the number of arguments specified in a macro defi- nition and the number of arguments provided in the macro call. Options for both absolute and C mode specified - C mode ignored Both the -A and -C options were given on the command line. The -A option takes precedence. Options for both debug and strip specified - strip ignored Both the -G and -Z options were given on the command line. The -G option takes precedence. P space not accessed - using MOVE encoding A MOVEP-type instruction was given but a P memory reference was not used as an operand. The Assembler substitutes a valid encoding for the operands in ques- tion. Page directive with no arguments ignored with page length of zero A PAGE directive with no arguments, which ordinarily produces a form feed in the listing output, is ignored because a previous PAGE directive specified a page length of zero. PC-relative address involves incompatible memory spaces The memory space attribute is regarded by the Assembler as a type, in the same sense that high level languages use type for variables. Symbols may have memory space attributes of X, Y, L, P(rogram), E(MI), or N(one); only N is fully compatible with all other attributes. In this case, an operand was evaluated with a different memory space attribute than that specified in the instruction. MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL C-9 Assembler Messages Warnings PC-relative address too large to use short - long substituted The PC-relative offset is not within the range specifying a short PC-relative offset, even though the short forcing operator has been used. The Assembler substitutes long PC-relative addressing. Pipeline stall reading register written in instruction at address xxxx Pipeline stall reading register written in previous instruction The Assembler warns when an extra cycle is inserted to circumvent a bus conflict. Possible duplicate destination register In the DSP96000 assembly language there is potential ambiguity in the specifica- tion of registers for some types of DALU instructions and parallel moves. The As- sembler detects the ambiguity and warns if a duplicate register write is possible. Post-update operation will not occur on destination register If the source operand in a MOVE operation specifies a post-update addressing mode and the destination register is the same as the source operand register then the post-update operation will not take place. PRCTL directive ignored - no explicit listing file The PRCTL directive takes effect only if the -L option is used on the command line to explicitly specify a listing file. Redefinition of symbol A symbol used in a DEFINE directive has been redefined without an intervening UNDEF directive. The Assembler discards the previous definition and replaces it with the new definition. Relative address involves incompatible memory spaces The target of a jump or branch instruction is not assigned to program memory. Rounding not available with LMS move - using MAC/MPY encoding A MACR or MPYR instruction was specified in conjunction with LMS move syntax. Runtime location counter overflow Runtime location counter underflow The runtime location counter exceeded its maximum or minimum value. The As- sembler wraps the counter value around and continues. C-10 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Assembler Messages Warnings Runtime origin involves incompatible memory spaces The memory space attribute is regarded by the Assembler as a type, in the same sense that high level languages use type for variables. Symbols may have memory space attributes of X, Y, L, P(rogram), E(MI), or N(one); only N is fully compatible with all other attributes. In this case, an operand was evaluated with a different memory space attribute than that specified in the directive. Runtime reserved address space violation The runtime location counter has incremented into a reserved area of data address space. Short absolute address cannot be forced Short absolute addressing is not valid for this operation. An appropriate addressing mode (long absolute) is substituted. Short absolute address cannot be forced - long substituted Short absolute addressing is not valid for this operation. The Assembler substitutes long absolute addressing. Short displacement cannot be forced Short displacement addressing is not valid for this operation. An appropriate ad- dressing mode (long displacement) is substituted. Short immediate cannot be forced Short immediate data is not valid for this operation. An appropriate size is substi- tuted. Short PC-relative address cannot be forced Short PC-relative addressing is not valid for this operation. An appropriate ad- dressing mode (long PC-relative) is substituted. Signed operand must come first in signed/unsigned combinations In a MPYSU, MACSU, or DMACSU instruction, the signed operand must come first in the operand ordering. Source operand assumed I/O short Neither operand in a MOVEP instruction is explicitly declared I/O short; however, the destination operand does not qualify, so the source operand is assumed to be the I/O short operand. MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL C-11 Assembler Messages Warnings Storage block size not a power of 2 The expression in a DSR directive did not evaluate to a power of 2. Since the DSR directive is generally used to allocate FFT buffers for reverse carry operations, the size of the buffer may be in error. String truncated in expression evaluation Only the first four characters of a string constant are used during expression eval- uation except for arguments to the DC directive (see Chapter 6). Strip not valid in relocatable mode - ignored The -Z option is valid only when the -A option is also given. Two-word instruction assembled at odd address in interrupt vector locations A two-word instruction may only be assembled at an even address within the inter- rupt vector range. Unresolved external reference Ordinarily the Assembler does not flag unresolved references in relative mode, as- suming they will be resolved at link time. If the UR option is specified, the Assem- bler will generate this warning if any symbols are undefined during the second pass. Using TFR3 encoding - only limiting performed on register transfer A parallel move was performed with an accumulator source register in the second data move field. The Assembler assumes a TFR3 transfer. C-12 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Assembler Messages Errors C.4 ERRORS Absolute address contains forward reference - force short or I/O short address The Assembler attempted a default to short addressing which failed. Either the ab- solute address is too large or it needs to be forced I/O short. Absolute address must be either short or I/O short The absolute address is too large for a short address and outside the range of valid I/O short addresses. Absolute address too large to use I/O short Absolute address too small to use I/O short The absolute address being forced short is outside the range of valid I/O short ad- dresses. This usually means that the I/O short address has not been ones extend- ed. Absolute address too large to use short The absolute address value is too large to be forced short. Absolute addressing mode not allowed Absolute operands are not allowed with some instructions, in particular parallel XY data memory moves. Address mode syntax error - expected ')' Address mode syntax error - expected '+' Address mode syntax error - expected '+' or '-' Address mode syntax error - expected comma Address mode syntax error - expected comma or end of field Address mode syntax error - expected offset register Address mode syntax error - extra characters Address mode syntax error - probably missing ')' A syntax error was detected when scanning the source line operand and/or X and Y data fields. These errors may indicate omission of a source operand, insufficient white space between fields, or improper specification of address register indirect addressing modes. Argument outside function domain An argument to one of the transcendental built-in functions was inappropriate. Arithmetic exception An internal floating point exception occurred while evaluating an expression. The result of the evaluation is probably not valid. MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL C-13 Assembler Messages Errors Assembler directive or mnemonic not found An argument to the RDIRECT directive was not a recognized Assembler directive or mnemonic. Base argument larger than machine word size The base parameter of a @FLD() function has a value larger than can fit in the tar- get machine word. Binary constant expected A character other than ASCII '0' or '1' either followed the binary constant delimiter (%) or appeared in an expression where a binary value was expected by default. Bit operation on SSH or SSL cannot follow update of SP or SC A move to the SP or SC register was followed by a bit manipulation instruction with destination of SSH or SSL. This operation is prohibited by the machine architec- ture. Bit mask cannot span more than eight bits If the first operand of a BFxxx-type instruction was shifted one bit to the right until the low-order bit was a 1, the resulting value must not exceed $FF hexadecimal. Cannot conditionally repeat write to memory A move to memory cannot be preceded by a REPcc-type instruction. Cannot nest section inside itself A section of a given name may not have another SECTION directive with the same name declared inside it. Cannot nest symbol definitions A source-level debug .DEF directive was encountered inside another .DEF-.EN- DEF pair. Cannot open include file The specified INCLUDE file cannot be found, or the operating system limit on open files has been exceeded. Cannot repeat this instruction Cannot repeat two-word instruction The REP instruction cannot be used to repeat two-word instructions or instructions that change program flow. Instructions that cannot be repeated include DO, Jcc, JCLR, JMP, JSET, JScc, JSCLR, JSR, JSSET, REP, RTI, RTS, and SWI. C-14 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Assembler Messages Errors CONST option must be used before any label This option, which prevents EQU symbols from being exported to the object file, must be given before any label is encountered in the source file. Contents of register written in previous instruction not available Due to pipelining, if an address register (Rn or Nn) is changed in the previous in- struction, the new contents are not available for use as a pointer until the next in- struction. Count must be an integer value The argument to a DUP directive did not evaluate as an integer expression. CRE option must be used before any label The CRE option must be activated before any labels are encountered so that the Assembler can append cross-reference data to all applicable symbol table entries. Data allocation exceeds buffer size Data allocated between a BUFFER-ENDBUF sequence exceeded the size speci- fied in the BUFFER directive. Decimal constant expected A character other than ASCII '0' through '9' either followed the decimal constant de- limiter (‘) or appeared in an expression where a decimal value was expected by de- fault. DEFINE symbol must be a global symbol name A local label (a symbol beginning with the underscore character) may not be used as a DEFINE directive symbol. Directive not allowed in EMI memory Any kind of buffer directive is disallowed when the runtime memory space is E(MI). Displacement addressing mode not allowed Long displacement addressing is not allowed with some instructions, in particular parallel XY data memory moves. Displacement must be short The offset operand value is too large for the space allotted in the instruction. MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL C-15 Assembler Messages Errors Displacement too large to use short The displacement value being forced short is too large to fit into the instruction word. Divide by zero The expression evaluator detected a divide by zero. DO loop address must be in current section The loop address of a DO loop cannot fall outside the bounds of its enclosing sec- tion. This is particularly important in relative mode as the loop address is calculat- ed based on the starting address of the section. Dummy argument not found The dummy argument name given as an argument to the @ARG() function was not found in the macro dummy argument list. Duplicate destination register not allowed If the opcode-operand portion of an instruction specifies a destination register, the same register or portion of that register may not be specified as a destination in the parallel data bus move operation. Duplicate source and destination register not allowed If the opcode-operand portion of an instruction specifies a source register, the same register or portion of that register may not be specified as a destination in the parallel data bus move operation. Either source or destination memory space must be X or Y One of the operands in a MOVEP instruction must reference a location in X or Y memory. ELSE without associated IF directive An ELSE directive was encountered without a preceding IF conditional assembly directive. .ELSE without associated .IF directive An .ELSE directive was encountered before a matching .IF conditional structured control statement. Empty bit mask field The first operand of a BFxxx-type instruction was zero. C-16 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Assembler Messages Errors End of structure or union without matching definition A source-level debug end-of-structure symbol declaration was recognized without a preceding structure or union definition. ENDBUF without associated BUFFER directive An ENDBUF directive was encountered without a preceding BUFFER directive. .ENDEF without associated .DEF directive A source-level debug .ENDEF directive was encountered without a preceding .DEF directive. .ENDF without associated .FOR directive .ENDI without associated .IF directive An end-of-conditional or end-of-loop directive was encountered before a matching conditional or loop structured control statement. ENDIF without associated IF directive An ENDIF directive was encountered without a preceding IF conditional assembly directive. .ENDL without associated .LOOP directive An end-of-loop directive was encountered before a matching loop structured con- trol statement. ENDM without associated MACRO directive An ENDM directive was encountered without a preceding MACRO directive. ENDSEC without associated SECTION directive An ENDSEC directive was encountered without a preceding SECTION directive. .ENDW without associated .WHILE directive An end-of-loop directive was encountered before a matching loop structured con- trol statement. EQU requires label The EQU directive must have a label to associate with the equated expression. EXITM without associated MACRO directive An EXITM directive was encountered without a preceding MACRO directive. MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL C-17 Assembler Messages Errors Expression cannot have a negative value Some directives do not allow negative expression arguments, as for example in the PAGE directive controls. Expression contains forward references Some directives do not allow expression arguments which have not yet been de- fined in the source, as for example in the IF, EQU, or SET directives. Expression involves incompatible memory spaces The memory space attribute is regarded by the Assembler as a type, in the same sense that high level languages use type for variables. Symbols may have memory space attributes of X, Y, L, P(rogram), E(MI), or N(one); only N is fully compatible with all other attributes. In this case, two operands were evaluated with different memory space attributes, neither of which was N. Expression must be greater than zero Some directives require a nonzero argument, as for example in the BSC directive. Expression result must be absolute Certain directives and some Assembler usage require absolute values as argu- ments or operands. Expression result must be integer Certain directives and some Assembler usage require integer values as arguments or operands. Expression result too large The expression evaluated to a value greater than the acceptable range. This error can occur when an expression result exceeds the native word size of the target DSP. External reference not allowed in expression References to external symbols (e.g. symbols not defined in the current assembly source input) are not allowed in some types of byte or integer expressions. External reference not allowed in function References to external symbols (e.g. symbols not defined in the current assembly source input) are not allowed as direct or indirect arguments to any built-in function. C-18 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Assembler Messages Errors Extra characters beyond expression The expression evaluator found extra characters after the end of a valid expres- sion. Unbalanced parentheses can cause this error. Extra characters following string An end-of-string delimiter was followed by unexpected characters on the source line. Extra characters following symbol name A non-alphanumeric character other than the underscore (_) was encountered in a symbol name. Extra characters in function argument or missing ')' for function Mismatched parentheses or wrong number of parameters in a function invocation. Extra characters in operand field The PAGE directive contains too many operands. Extra fields ignored There were extra fields specified in an Assembler directive. First data move destination accumulator same as operand destination accumulator The destination of the data move field is the same as the Data ALU destination. First data move field required with this instruction A TFR3 instruction requires a register and a data move operand field. First data move source accumulator same as operand destination accumulator The source of the data move field is the same as the Data ALU destination. Floating point constant expected A character other than ASCII '0' through '9', 'e' or 'E', or '.' appeared in an expres- sion where a floating point value was expected by default. Floating point not allowed in relative expression Relative expressions are generally used for address computation, therefore a float- ing point value would not be appropriate. Floating point value not allowed An immediate value expressed in floating point notation is only valid in a MOVE- type instruction. MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL C-19 Assembler Messages Errors Forcing not specified The type of forcing operand was not given in a FORCE directive. Function result out of range The result computed by a transcendental function was too large to be represented on the host machine. GL option must be used before any section The GL option must be activated before any explicit sections are encountered so that the Assembler can insure that all section symbols are global. GLOBAL without preceding SECTION directive A GLOBAL directive was encountered outside any previously defined section. GS option must be used before any section The GS option must be activated before any explicit sections are encountered so that the Assembler can use the appropriate counters for section relocation. Hex constant expected A character other than ASCII '0' through '9', 'a' through 'f', or 'A' through 'F' either followed the hexadecimal constant delimiter ($) or appeared in an expression where a hexadecimal value was expected by default. IC option must be used before any symbol, section, or macro definition The IC option must be activated before any symbols, sections, or macros are de- fined so that the Assembler can remain consistent when storing label names in the symbol table. IDENT directive must contain revision number IDENT directive must contain version number The version and revision numbers are both required arguments for the IDENT di- rective. Illegal directive in buffer declaration A directive was encountered between a BUFFER-ENDBUF pair that is not allowed in that context. Some invalid directives include any other buffer-type directive (DSM, DSR, etc.), section directives, or any directive which alters the current loca- tion counter designation (MODE, ORG). C-20 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Assembler Messages Errors Illegal directive inside .DEF-.ENDEF declaration Illegal directive outside .DEF-.ENDEF declaration Some source-level debug directives, such as .FILE, make no sense and are not allowed inside .DEF-.ENDEF declarations. Conversely, other directives such as .VAL are not allowed outside of a .DEF-.ENDEF declaration. Illegal directive inside DO loop A directive was encountered inside a DO loop that is not allowed in that context. Some invalid directives include any buffer-type directive (DSM, DSR, etc.), section directives, or any directive which alters the current location counter designation (MODE, ORG). Illegal function argument An invalid argument was passed to one of the Assembler built-in functions, in par- ticular the @LCV() function. Illegal instruction in single-instruction DO loop A conditional break instruction (BRKcc) cannot be used as the only instruction in a DO loop. Illegal memory counter specified The memory counter designation supplied in the ORG directive was not one of H (high), L (low), or a positive integer expression in parentheses. Illegal memory map character The memory map character supplied in the ORG directive was not one of I (inter- nal), E (external), R (ROM), A (port A), or B (port B). Illegal memory space specified Illegal memory space specified - L: Illegal memory space specified - P: Illegal memory space specified - X: Illegal memory space specified - Y: The memory space given is either invalid or inappropriate for the desired operation. Illegal move field destination specified Illegal move field destination register specified The destination operand in a data memory move is invalid for the type of instruction specified. MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL C-21 Assembler Messages Errors Illegal move field source specified The source operand in a data memory move is invalid for the type of instruction specified. Illegal operator for floating point element Bitwise operators are invalid for floating point values. Illegal option An argument to the OPT directive is invalid. Illegal processor type The argument to the -P command line option is invalid. Illegal revision The argument to the -R command line option is invalid. Illegal secondary mnemonic The secondary mnemonic to an FMPY instruction was not one of FADD, FSUB, or FADDSUB. Illegal use of SSH as loop count operand The contents of the system stack high register may not be used as the loop count operand of a DO instruction. Illegal X field destination specified Illegal X field destination register specified Illegal Y field destination specified The destination operand in an X or Y memory data move is invalid for the type of instruction specified. Illegal Y field source specified The source operand in an X memory data move is invalid for the type of instruction specified. Immediate addressing mode not allowed Immediate operands are not allowed with some instructions, in particular program memory moves (MOVEM). Immediate operand not allowed Immediate operands are not allowed with some instructions, in particular program memory moves (MOVEM). C-22 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Assembler Messages Errors Immediate operand required The ANDI and ORI instructions must have an immediate value as the source op- erand. Immediate value outside 0..55 range The immediate operand for a multi-bit arithmetic shift is too large for the space al- lotted in the instruction. Immediate value too large The immediate operand value is too large for the space allotted in the instruction. Immediate value too large to use short The immediate value being forced short is too large to fit into the instruction word. Increment value cannot be zero The increment parameter to a DUPF directive must be greater than zero. Indexed address mode not allowed XY parallel data moves and the LEA instruction do not allow indexed addressing mode. Initial debug directive must be .FILE In a source file containing debug directives being assembled with the -G option the .FILE directive must be the first source-level debug directive in the input stream. Instruction cannot appear at last address of a DO loop Instruction cannot appear at next to last address of a DO loop Instruction cannot appear within last 2 words of a DO loop Instruction cannot appear within last 3 words of a DO loop Some instructions are restricted within a variable range of the DO instruction loop address. These instructions include DO, ENDDO, JMP, Jcc, JCLR, JSET, and moves to or from particular control registers. Instruction cannot appear immediately after arithmetic or logical instruction A BREAK instruction must not appear immediately after any DALU instruction. Instruction cannot appear immediately after control register access Some instructions must not appear immediately after certain control registers have been accessed. These instructions include RTI, RTS, DO, and ENDDO. MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL C-23 Assembler Messages Errors Instruction does not allow data movement specified The desired operation may only be done with a MOVE instruction. Invalid address expression An attempt was made to evaluate an expression consisting of two relative terms with the same sign. Invalid addressing mode The addressing mode of one of the operands in the instruction was not recognized. Invalid buffer type The buffer type specified in a BADDR or BUFFER directive was not one of M (mod- ulo) or R (reverse-carry). Invalid conditional register transfer syntax The syntax for an IFcc or FFcc conditional address register move was incorrect. Invalid destination register The first data move destination register in a double memory read operation was not valid. Invalid dummy argument name Macro argument names cannot be local symbols, e.g. they cannot begin with the underscore (_) character. Invalid force type The argument to a FORCE directive must be SHORT, LONG, or NONE. Invalid function name The name following the function invocation character (@) was not recognized. Invalid label field width specified The argument given to the LSTCOL directive does not allow enough room on the listing line for the remaining fields to be output. Invalid macro name Macro names cannot be local symbols, e.g. they cannot begin with the underscore (_) character. Invalid memory space attribute The memory space attribute given is not one of the letters X, Y, L, P, or E. C-24 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Assembler Messages Errors Invalid mode The mode specified in a MODE directive was not either RELATIVE or ABSOLUTE. Invalid opcode field width specified Invalid opcode 2 field width specified Invalid operand field width specified Invalid operand 2 field width specified The argument given to the LSTCOL directive does not allow enough room on the listing line for the remaining fields to be output. Invalid option for target processor The PSM/NOPSM options are only available on the 56100 series of processors. Invalid page length specified The minimum page length allowed by the PAGE directive is 10 lines per page. The maximum is 255. Invalid page width specified The minimum page width allowed by the PAGE directive is 1 column per line. The maximum is 255. Invalid radix expression The expression in the RADIX directive does not evaluate to one of the supported constant bases (2, 8, 10, or 16). Invalid register combination The source operand registers in a FMPY instruction cannot be used together. Invalid register specified The direct register operand is incorrect for this instruction. Invalid relative expression The terms of a relative expression may only participate in addition and subtraction operations and must have opposing signs. Invalid secondary opcode The opcode in the second operation field is not one of the instructions FADD, FSUB, or FADDSUB. Invalid section directive modifier The qualifier specified in a SECTION directive was not either GLOBAL or STATIC. MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL C-25 Assembler Messages Errors Invalid section name Section names cannot be local symbols, e.g. they cannot begin with the under- score (_) character. Invalid shift amount A shift expression must evaluate to within the range 0 <= n <= m, where m is the maximum address of the target DSP. Invalid source address mode The source address mode in a MOVEP instruction was not valid. Invalid source address register Invalid source register The source register in a double memory read operation was not valid. Invalid storage class The storage class given in a source-level debug symbol declaration is unknown. Invalid tabs stops specified The argument to the TAB directive is out of range. Invalid X field destination address mode Invalid X field source address mode The address mode in the source or destination of the X data move field was invalid. Invalid X field width specified Invalid Y field width specified The argument given to the LSTCOL directive does not allow enough room on the listing line for the remaining fields to be output. Invalid XY address register specification In some XY memory parallel data moves, if the register forming the effective ad- dress of the X data field is from the set R0-R3, the effective address register in the Y field must be from the set R4-R7. Conversely, if the register forming the effective address of the X data field is from the set R4-R7, the effective address register in the Y field must be from the set R0-R3. Invalid XY data register specification In some XY memory parallel data moves, if the data register of the X data field is from the set D0-D3, the data register in the Y field must be from the set D4-D7. C-26 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Assembler Messages Errors Conversely, if the data register of the X data field is from the set D4-D7, the data register in the Y field must be from the set D0-D3. I/O short addressing mode not allowed An operand was forced I/O short when I/O short addressing was not allowed. Jump based on SSH or SSL cannot follow update of SP Jump via SSH or SSL cannot follow write to SP A JSET, JCLR, JSSET, or JSCLR instruction which tested a bit in either the SSH or SSL register was immediately preceded by a MOVE to the SP register. L space specified for load, but not for runtime L space specified for runtime, but not for load Since L memory space is the only double-wide memory space, if L memory space is the runtime memory space, the only valid load memory space is L. Likewise, L memory space can never be specified as the load memory space if runtime mem- ory space is X, Y, or P. LB option must be used before any code or data generation The LB option must be specified before any code or data in order for the Assembler to increment the location counter appropriately. LB option not allowed in EMI load memory The LB option is not supported when the load memory is configured as EMI mem- ory. LDB option must be used before any code or data generation The LDB option must be specified before any code or data in order for the Assem- bler to establish the debug source file appropriately. Left margin exceeds page width The blank left margin value in the PAGE directive exceeds the default or specified page width parameter. Length value greater than string size The length parameter in a substring construct is larger than the composite length of the input string argument. Line too long Source statements, including continuation lines, cannot exceed 512 characters in length. MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL C-27 Assembler Messages Errors LOC option must be used before any local label The LOC option must appear before any local label so that the Assembler can keep the local label lists synchronized. LOCAL directive not valid in global section The LOCAL directive is not allowed inside an implicit or explicit global section. Local symbol names cannot be used with GLOBAL Local symbol names cannot be used with LOCAL Local symbol names cannot be used with XDEF Local symbol names cannot be used with XREF Underscore labels are not allowed with this directive. LOCAL without preceding SECTION directive A LOCAL directive was encountered outside any previously defined section. Long absolute address cannot be used An operand was forced long where only a short or I/O short address was valid. Long absolute cannot be used - force short or I/O short A forward reference was forced long where only a short or I/O short address was valid. Macro cannot be redefined A macro name cannot be used as the label for a second macro definition in the same source file unless the macro is defined and used within a declared section (see the SECTION directive, Chapter 6). Macro not defined The macro name was not found in the macro lookup table. Macro value substitution failed The evaluation of a macro argument expression failed. Memory bounds greater than maximum address The bounds argument in a LOMEM or HIMEM directive is invalid. Memory counter designator value too large The integer counter designator in an ORG directive is greater than 65535. C-28 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Assembler Messages Errors Memory space must be P or NONE An END directive was encountered while the runtime memory space was X, Y, or L. Missing '(' for function All Assembler built-in functions require at least one argument which must be en- closed in parentheses. Missing ')' in expression Parentheses are not balanced in an expression. Missing argument The argument to a DUPA or DUPC directive was not found. Missing definition string The substitution string for a DEFINE directive is missing. Missing delimiter in substring A substring construct was missing the closing square bracket. Missing dimension The .DIM directive had no arguments. Missing directive name The argument to an RDIRECT directive is missing. Missing expression An expression was expected by the expression evaluator. Missing filename No filename was provided as an argument to the INCLUDE directive. Missing line number No line number was provided as an argument to the .LINE directive. Missing macro name A MACRO directive was encountered without a label or the macro name was omit- ted from a PMACRO directive. MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL C-29 Assembler Messages Errors Missing memory space specifier One of the operands of an instruction was expected to have a memory space spec- ifier (X:, Y:, L:, or P:) preceding the address mode specifier. Missing option The OPT directive was specified without an argument. Missing or illegal memory space specifier One of the operands of an instruction was expected to have a memory space spec- ifier (X:, Y:, L:, or P:) preceding the address mode specifier. Missing or mismatched quote A single or double quote character was expected by the string parsing routines. Missing pathname No pathname was provided as an argument to the MACLIB directive. Missing processor type There was no argument provided for the -P command line option. Missing quote Missing quote in string A single or double quote character was expected by the string parsing routines. Missing revision There was no argument provided for the -R command line option. Missing section name No section name was given as an argument to the SECTION directive. Missing size argument No size value was given as an argument to the .SIZE directive. Missing string after concatenation operator The string concatenation operator (++) must be followed by another quoted string. Missing symbol name The SYMOBJ, XDEF, and XREF directives require at least one symbol name as an argument. C-30 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Assembler Messages Errors Missing symbol value No symbol value was given as an argument to the .VAL directive. Missing tag for end of structure or union A source-level debug structure or union declaration was found without a corre- sponding tag definition. Missing tag name No tag name was given as an argument to the .TAG directive. Mnemonic must indicate precision using .S or .X suffix Floating point instructions generally must indicate the precision of their operation by appending either .S for single precision or .X for single-extended precision. Mode not specified The MODE directive was not followed by either RELATIVE or ABSOLUTE. Move from SSH or SSL cannot follow move to SP Move from SSH or SSL cannot follow update to SP A MOVE instruction using the system stack (SSH or SSL) as a source operand cannot immediately follow a MOVE which uses the stack pointer (SP) as a desti- nation operand. MU option must be used before any code or data generation The MU option must be given before any data allocation directive (BSC, DC, DS, DSM, DSR) or any instruction appears in the source file. Negative immediate value not allowed The immediate count value for a DO or REP instruction cannot be less than zero. Negative or empty DO loop not allowed Negative or empty DOR loop not allowed The loop address given in a DO or DOR instruction must specify an address at least one greater than the current program counter value. NOGS option must be used before any section The NOGS option must be activated before any explicit sections are encountered so that the Assembler can use the appropriate counters for section relocation. No previous function declaration A .EF debugging directive was encountered without a corresponding .BF directive. MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL C-31 Assembler Messages Errors Not enough fields specified for instruction There were no operands specified for a MOVE, MOVEC, MOVEM, or MOVEP in- struction. No-update mode not allowed The no-update register addressing mode is not allowed for this instruction (e.g., the LEA instruction). Offset register number must be the same as address register number The explicit offset register number in an operand using post-increment, post-dec- rement, or indexed by offset addressing mode (Nn) is different from the number specified for the address register (Rn). The offset register number may be omitted from these types of indirect addressing modes; the Assembler defaults to the ad- dress register number. Offset value greater than string size The offset parameter in a substring construct is larger than the composite length of the input string argument. Only absolute addressing allowed The instruction allows only absolute addressing. Only absolute and register direct addressing allowed The instruction allows only absolute and register direct addressing. Only immediate addressing allowed The instruction allows an immediate source operand only. Only immediate and register direct addressing allowed The instruction allows only immediate and register direct addressing modes. Only immediate and register direct and indirect addressing allowed The instruction allows only immediate, register direct, and register indirect ad- dressing modes. Only PC-relative addressing allowed The instruction allows only PC-relative addressing. Only PC-relative and register direct addressing allowed The instruction allows only PC-relative and register direct addressing. C-32 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Assembler Messages Errors Only post-increment by offset addressing allowed with LMS move The initial data move destination operand in an LMS move must use post-incre- ment by offset addressing. Only post-increment or post-increment by offset addressing allowed Moves to P memory allow only post-increment or post-increment by offset address- ing. Only register direct addressing allowed The instruction allows only register direct addressing. Only register direct and indirect addressing allowed The instruction allows only register direct and indirect addressing. Only register indirect addressing allowed The instruction allows only register indirect addressing. Operation not allowed with address term Only addition and subtraction are allowed in expressions involving addresses or relative terms. Page length too small for specified top and bottom margins The sum of the top and bottom margins specified in the PAGE directive is greater than the page length - 10. Page length too small to allow default bottom margin The bottom margin exceeds the page length specified in the PAGE directive. PC-relative address too large to use short The PC-relative offset being forced short is too large to fit into the instruction word. PC-relative addressing mode not allowed The PC-relative addressing mode is not allowed for this instruction. The restriction applies, for example, to bit manipulation instructions and some jump-type instruc- tions. Phasing error The value associated with a symbol has changed between pass 1 of the assembly and pass 2. This error can occur spontaneously in conjunction with other errors. The Assembler is designed to avoid phasing errors in general. If a phasing error MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL C-33 Assembler Messages Errors occurs without any other errors this may represent an internal error which should be reported to Motorola. One exception is the use of the checksumming function @CHK() with the EQU di- rective. Instruction encoding may be incomplete after the first pass due to forward referencing, causing the checksum value to change between passes. Because of this the SET directive must be used to assign the checksum value to a symbol. Possible invalid white space between operands or arguments The Assembler verifies that fields which should not contain operands or values are empty. If these fields are not empty the Assembler produces this error. Post-decrement addressing mode not allowed The post-decrement addressing mode is not allowed for this instruction. The re- striction applies, for example, to bit manipulation instructions and some jump-type instructions. Post-decrement by offset addressing mode not allowed The post-decrement by offset addressing mode is not allowed for this instruction. The restriction applies, for example, to bit manipulation instructions and some jump-type instructions. Post-increment addressing mode not allowed The post-increment addressing mode is not allowed for this instruction. The restric- tion applies, for example, to bit manipulation instructions and some jump-type in- structions. Post-increment by offset addressing mode not allowed The post-increment by offset addressing mode is not allowed for this instruction. The restriction applies, for example, to bit manipulation instructions and some jump-type instructions. Pre-decrement addressing mode not allowed The pre-decrement addressing mode is not allowed for this instruction. The restric- tion applies, for example, to instructions which include parallel XY memory data transfers. RDIRECT directive not allowed in section Since the effect of the RDIRECT directive is global, it cannot be used within a sec- tion which has been declared using the SECTION directive. Move the RDIRECT directive outside the declared section to avoid this error. C-34 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Assembler Messages Errors Redefinition would overflow line A substitution string declared using the DEFINE directive will cause the current source line to overflow if substitution occurs. Reference outside of current buffer block Reference outside of current overlay block Reference was made to an underscore local label which fell outside the current buffer or overlay definition. Register direct addressing not allowed Register direct addressing mode is not allowed for this instruction. The restriction applies, for example, to bit manipulation instructions, some jump-type instructions, and parallel XY data memory moves. Register displacement valid only with address register R2 Only address register R2 is valid as a displacement register. Relative equate must be in same section An EQU directive with a relative expression operand must be defined in the same section as the section associated with the operand expression. Relative expression must be integer A relative expression must evaluate to an integer value. Relative expression not allowed Relative expressions are not allowed as arguments to the Assembler built-in func- tions. Relative SET must be in same section A SET directive with a relative expression operand must be defined in the same section as the section associated with the operand expression. Relative terms from different sections not allowed Relative terms defined in different sections are not allowed in expressions. This is because the relationship between the terms is based on where the enclosing sec- tions are located in memory. Relocatable load origin must be in current memory, section, and counter Relocatable runtime origin must be in current memory, section, and counter The origin expression does not refer to the current memory space, section, or lo- cation counter number. MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL C-35 Assembler Messages Errors Reserved name used for symbol name One of the DSP register names has been used as a label, operand, or directive ar- gument. These register names, in either upper or lower case, are reserved by the Assembler. See Appendix F for a list of DSP register names. Runtime space must be P An instruction was encountered and the runtime memory space was not set to P (Program). SCO option must be used before any label The SCO option sends structured control statements to the object file and thus must be specified before any symbols are defined in the source file. Second data move destination accumulator same as operand destination accumulator The destination accumulator in a double memory read instruction is the same as the DALU accumulator specification. Secondary opcode not allowed The secondary opcode field is allowed only with the FMPY instruction. Section not encountered on pass 1 The section declared in a SECTION directive was not encountered during the first pass of the Assembler. This situation indicates an internal Assembler error and should be reported to Motorola. SET requires label The SET directive must have a label in order to associate the directive argument with a symbol name. SET symbol names cannot be used with GLOBAL SET symbol names cannot be used with LOCAL SET symbol names cannot be used with XDEF A symbol defined using the SET directive cannot be exported from a section using GLOBAL, LOCAL, or XDEF. Short absolute address too large The flagged operand value is greater than the maximum short address of the target DSP. C-36 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Assembler Messages Errors Short displacement too large The flagged operand value is greater than the maximum short displacement of the target DSP. Short I/O absolute address too large Short I/O absolute address too small The flagged operand value is outside the I/O address range of the target DSP. Short or I/O short address expected A short or I/O short address was expected as the second operand of a JCLR, JSET, JSCLR, or JSSET instruction. Short PC-relative address too large The flagged operand value is greater than the maximum PC-relative address of the target DSP. SSH cannot be both source and destination register In a MOVE instruction, the SSH register cannot be both the source and destination operand. Start argument greater than machine word size The start parameter of a @FLD() function has a value larger than can fit in the tar- get machine word. Start position greater than source string size The start parameter in a @POS() function is larger than the total length of the source string argument. Storage block size must be greater than zero The size of a buffer allocated with the DSM, DSR, BSM, BSB, and other buffer di- rectives was too small. Storage block size out of range The size of the buffer in a DSM, DSR, BSM, BSB, or other buffer directive is too large to be allocated. Storage block too large The runtime location counter overflowed while the Assembler was attempting to al- locate storage through a DSM or DSR directive. The Assembler automatically ad- vances the program counter to the next valid base address given the size of the modulo or reverse carry buffer. This error occurs when the sum of the expression MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL C-37 Assembler Messages Errors in the DSM or DSR directive and the runtime location counter value exceed avail- able memory in the current memory space. Structure or union tag mismatch A matching tag name could not be found for the current source-level debug struc- ture or union declaration. Subroutine branch not allowed after write to SP or SC register Subroutine jump not allowed after write to SP or SC register A subroutine call cannot be made immediately after a move to the SP or SC regis- ters. Subroutine branch to loop address not allowed A BSR, BScc, BSSET, or BSCLR instruction cannot have as its target the loop ad- dress of the current DO loop. Subroutine jump to loop address not allowed A JSR, JScc, JSSET, or JSCLR instruction cannot have as its target the loop ad- dress of the current DO loop. SVO option must be used before any code or data generation The SVO option must be given before any data allocation directive (BSC, DC, DS, DSM, DSR) or any instruction appears in the source file. Symbol already defined as GLOBAL Symbol already defined as LOCAL Symbol already defined as XDEF Symbol already defined as XREF The symbol used in an GLOBAL, LOCAL, XDEF, or XREF directive has already been defined in a previous directive of the same type. Symbol already defined as global A symbol specified in an XDEF directive has already been defined as global out- side the current section. Symbol already defined in current section A symbol specified in an XREF directive has already been defined as private within the current section. Symbol already used as SET symbol The label has already been used in a SET directive. A symbol defined with SET cannot be redefined except through another SET directive. C-38 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Assembler Messages Errors Symbol cannot be set to new value The label has been defined previously other than with the SET directive. Only sym- bols defined using the SET directive may be redefined. Symbol defined in current section before GLOBAL directive Symbol defined in current section before XDEF directive The GLOBAL or XDEF directive must appear within a section prior to the definition of any symbols in its argument list. Any symbols within a section which must be accessible outside the section should be declared in a GLOBAL or XDEF directive immediately following the SECTION directive. Symbol name too long Symbols are limited to 512 characters. The first character must be alphabetic or the underscore character (A-Z, a-z, _). The remaining characters must be alphanu- meric, including the underscore character (A-Z, a-z, 0-9, _). Symbol not previously defined The symbol specified in an UNDEF directive was not previously defined in a DE- FINE directive. Symbol redefined The symbol has already been used as a label in a previous context. Symbol tag mismatch A matching tag reference could not be found for a tagged symbol table entry. Symbol undefined on pass 2 The symbol used as an operand or directive argument was never defined in the source program. Symbols must start with alphabetic character Symbol names must begin with an upper or lower case alphabetic character or the underscore character (_). SYMOBJ symbol must be a global symbol name Arguments to the SYMOBJ directive cannot be preceded by an underscore. Syntax error - expected '):' In an ORG directive using numeric counter designations the parenthesis/colon pair separating the load or runtime address from the memory space, counter, or map- ping characters was not found. MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL C-39 Assembler Messages Errors Syntax error - expected ':' In an ORG directive the colon separating the load or runtime address from the memory space, counter, or mapping characters was not found. Syntax error - expected '>' The closing angle bracket in a non-local INCLUDE directive argument was not found. Syntax error - expected comma The comma separating operands in an instruction or directive was not found. Syntax error - expected keyword BY In a .FOR structured control statement something other than the optional step clause preceded by the keyword BY was encountered. Syntax error - expected keyword DO In a .WHILE structured control statement something other than the optional DO keyword was encountered at the end of the statement. Syntax error - expected keyword TO or DOWNTO In a .FOR structured control statement something other than the loop target clause preceded by the keyword TO or DOWNTO was encountered. Syntax error - expected quote The Assembler was expecting the start of a quoted string. Syntax error - extra characters Extra characters were found after an instruction or directive operand. Syntax error - invalid assignment operator The loop assignment operator in a .FOR structured control statement is not an equals sign (=). Syntax error - invalid compound operator Structured control statement compound operators are either AND or OR. Syntax error - invalid conditional operator The conditional operator in a structure control statement expression is not valid. Syntax error - invalid expression format The condition code expression in a structured control statement is malformed. C-40 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Assembler Messages Errors Syntax error - invalid statement terminator There were extra or invalid characters found at the end of a structured control statement. Syntax error - missing address mode specifier An instruction operand was not specified. Syntax error - missing operand An operand in a structured control statement expression was missing. Syntax error in directive name list A character other than a comma was found separating the arguments in an RDI- RECT or SYMOBJ directive name list. Syntax error in dummy argument list A character other than a comma was found separating the dummy arguments in a macro definition (MACRO directive), or a dummy argument began with the under- score character (_). Syntax error in macro argument list A character other than a comma was found separating the arguments in a macro call. Syntax error in macro name list A character other than a comma was found separating the arguments in a PMAC- RO directive name list. Syntax error in symbol name list A character other than a comma was found separating the arguments in an XDEF or XREF directive name list. Tag name not found A matching tag name could not be found for the current source-level debug struc- ture or union declaration. Too many fields specified for instruction An instruction field that was expected to be empty contained data other than a com- ment. This can happen when an instruction using only the X data transfer field en- counters data other than a comment in the Y data transfer field. MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL C-41 Assembler Messages Errors Two dummy arguments are the same Two dummy arguments in a macro definition (MACRO directive) have the same name. UNDEF symbol must be a global symbol name The argument to an UNDEF directive cannot be a local label, e.g. a name starting with the underscore character (_). Unexpected end of file - missing .ENDF Unexpected end of file - missing .ENDI Unexpected end of file - missing .ENDL Unexpected end of file - missing .ENDW Unexpected end of file - missing .UNTIL The matching end-of-conditional or end-of-loop directive for a conditional or loop- ing structured control statement was never found. Unexpected end of file - missing COMMENT delimiter The second occurrence of the delimiter character in a COMMENT directive was never found. Unexpected end of file - missing ENDBUF A BUFFER directive was encountered without a closing ENDBUF directive. Unexpected end of file - missing ENDIF An IF directive was encountered without a closing ENDIF directive. Unexpected end of file - missing ENDM A macro definition was started using the MACRO directive, but the end of the source file was encountered before a closing ENDM directive was found. Unexpected end of file - missing ENDSEC A SECTION directive was found without a closing ENDSEC directive. Unknown math error A transcendental math function returned an error that could not be classified as out of range or outside the function domain. Unrecognized mnemonic A symbol in the Assembler opcode field was not a defined macro, an instruction mnemonic, or a directive. C-42 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Assembler Messages Errors Unrecognized secondary mnemonic A symbol in the Assembler secondary opcode field was not one of the instructions FADD, FSUB, or FADDSUB. .UNTIL without associated .REPEAT directive An .UNTIL directive was encountered before a matching .REPEAT structured con- trol statement. Value argument larger than machine word size The value parameter of a @FLD() function has a value larger than can fit in the tar- get machine word. Width argument greater than machine word size The width parameter of a @FLD() function has a value larger than can fit in the tar- get machine word. XDEF without preceding SECTION directive XREF without preceding SECTION directive An XDEF or XREF directive was encountered outside any previously defined sec- tion. XLL option must be used before any local label The XLL option must be activated before any local labels are encountered so that the Assembler can make the appropriate entries in the symbol table. XR option must be used before any label The XR option must be activated before any labels are encountered so that the As- sembler can make the appropriate entries in the symbol table. MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL C-43 Assembler Messages Fatal Errors C.5 FATAL ERRORS Attempt to store external reference data in absolute mode An attempt was made to create an external reference entry while the Assembler was in absolute mode. This is an internal error that should be reported to Motorola. Attempt to write relocation entry in absolute mode An attempt was made to write a relocation entry to the object file while the Assem- bler was in absolute mode. This is an internal error that should be reported to Mo- torola. C-44 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Assembler Messages Fatal Errors Cannot write file header to object file Cannot write line number entries to object file Cannot write optional header to object file Cannot write relocation entries to object file Cannot write section headers to object file Cannot write string table to object file Cannot write symbols to object file An I/O error occurred which prevented the Assembler from writing data to the out- put object file. Cannot write control string to listing file Cannot write left margin to listing file Cannot write new line to listing file Cannot write new page to listing file Cannot write page header to listing file Cannot write string to listing file An I/O error occurred which prevented the Assembler from writing data to the out- put listing file. chkdalu failure chkdrd failure An internal Assembler check routine has failed. Compare select error The comparison indicator passed to the evaluator selection logic was not valid. This is a serious internal error that should be reported to Motorola. Debug symbol type failure The symbol type indicator passed to the debug selection logic was not valid. This is a serious internal error that should be reported to Motorola. Directive select error The directive indicator passed to the directive selection logic was not valid. This is a serious internal error that should be reported to Motorola. DO stack out of sequence The Assembler maintains an internal stack representing DO loop nesting levels. The internal stack pointers have been corrupted. do_xy memory space select failure The memory space passed to the parallel move routines is invalid. MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL C-45 Assembler Messages Fatal Errors Error in mnemonic table The indicator passed to the instruction processing logic was not valid. This is a se- rious internal error that should be reported to Motorola. Expression operator failure Expression operator lookup has failed. This is a serious internal error that should be reported to Motorola. Expression stack underflow An attempt has been made to free an expression when there are none to be freed. This is an internal error that should be reported to Motorola. Fatal segmentation or protection fault; contact Motorola A program error has caused the Assembler to access an invalid host system ad- dress. This generally indicates a bug in the Assembler software. File info out of sequence File debug information is scrambled. This is a serious internal error that should be reported to Motorola. File not encountered on pass 1 The file in the source input list was never processed by the Assembler during pass 1. This is an internal error that should be reported to Motorola. Immediate mode select error The mode indicator passed to the immediate addressing mode selection logic was not valid. This is a serious internal error that should be reported to Motorola. Input mode stack out of sequence The stack for recording whether input is from a file or a macro expansion has been corrupted. This is an internal error that should be reported to Motorola. Invalid DO loop range check The value passed to the end-of-DO-loop verification logic is bad. This is an internal error that should be reported to Motorola. Invalid instruction class The saved MAC-type instruction class has been corrupted. This is an internal error that should be reported to Motorola. C-46 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Assembler Messages Fatal Errors Invalid tag storage class The saved tag storage class has been corrupted. This is an internal error that should be reported to Motorola. I/O error writing data word to object file An I/O error occurred which prevented the Assembler from writing data to the out- put object file. Location bounds selection failure The logic for selecting the appropriate bounds array based on the current memory space has returned a bad value. This is an internal error that should be reported to Motorola. mulreg failure The register indicators given in a multiply instruction have been corrupted. This is a serious internal error that should be reported to Motorola. Option select error The option indicator passed to the option selection logic (OPT directive) was not valid. This is a serious internal error that should be reported to Motorola. Out of memory - assembly aborted There is not enough internal memory to perform dynamic storage allocation. Since the Assembler keeps all working information in memory, including the symbol table and macro definitions, there is the possibility that memory will be exhausted if many symbols or macros are defined in a single assembly run. PC-relative mode select failure The mode indicator passed to the PC-relative addressing mode selection logic was not valid. This is a serious internal error that should be reported to Motorola. Register selection failure The register number passed to the multiply mask selection logic was not valid. This is a serious internal error that should be reported to Motorola. Section counter sequence failure The ordering of location counter structures has been corrupted. This is an internal error that should be reported to Motorola. MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL C-47 Assembler Messages Fatal Errors Section stack mode error The Assembler expected to restore a nested section but found the section list emp- ty. This is an internal error that should be reported to Motorola. Too many lines in source file An individual source file contained more than 2**31 lines of code. Too many sections in module There is a limit of 255 discrete sections in a given source file. Unrecognized transformation mnemonic The lookup of an FADD or FSUB secondary operand failed. This is an internal error that should be reported to Motorola. xdst_mem failure Operands in a register to memory move have been corrupted. This is an internal error that should be reported to Motorola. C-48 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Appendix D ASSEMBLER LISTING FILE FORMAT D.1 INTRODUCTION The Assembler always produces a source listing file unless the command line option -OIL (inhibit listing) is specified. See Chapter 1, Running The Assembler, and the OPT directive in Chapter 6 for more information on command line and listing options. If the -L command line option is given, the listing goes to the file named as the option argument; if no argu- ment is specified, the listing file takes the name of the first source file on the command line and changes the extension to .LST (see Chapter 1). If the -L option is omitted, the listing is routed to the standard output, which in most cases is the console or user terminal by default. Most of the operating systems which host the Assembler support I/O redirec- tion, so that the standard output may be redirected to an arbitrary destination (printer, file, null device, etc.). D.2 LISTING FILE COMMENTARY Figure D-1 is an Assembler-generated listing of a program employing a 16-point Decima- tion in Time Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) routine implemented as a macro. The listing illustrates a selection of the format features offered by the Assembler. The following sec- tion highlights some of those features. At the top of every listing page is a banner which identifies the Assembler and lists its ver- sion number, the date and time of assembly, the current input file name, and the page number. Following the banner on pages other than the first would appear any titles or sub- titles specified using the TITLE and STITLE directives, respectively. On line 1 of this particular program an OPT directive specifies data value expansion of declared constants (CEX), cross-referencing of both local and global symbol names (LOC and CRE), and generation of memory utilization reports at the end of the listing (MU). The format of cross-reference and memory utilization reports is discussed in later sections. On line 2 a PAGE directive specifies the page dimensions. Note that line 3 is missing. In the source file there is a TITLE directive on line 3; TITLE and STITLE directives do not appear in the listing file. The title itself does not appear until the next page of the listing. A MACLIB directive declares a macro library path on line 5. The significance of this to the appearance of the listing will be discussed shortly. The comment lines following (and all MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL D-1 Assembler Listing File Format Listing File Commentary lines) have been shifted right to make room for line numbers and constant or data value displays, as for example with the group of equates beginning on line 12. On line 19 an INCLUDE directive causes the source input to be switched to a file named SIN16.ASM in the FFTLIB subdirectory. This usage of INCLUDE is provided for illustrative purposes, since the previous MACLIB declaration makes it unnecessary. By line 20 the input stream has changed to the new file; the first line of the new file is the definition line for a macro that will initialize the FFT sine and cosine tables in X and Y memory. Notice the lower case ‘m’ to the right of the line number on line 21 and following. This indicates that a macro definition is in progress; the lines are not assembled but are retained for mac- ro expansion later. At line 41 the ENDM directive is encountered, as well as the end of the included macro file. The source input reverts to the original file, the next line of which is an invocation of the macro (SIN16) just defined. Since the MEX option was not specified, the macro ex- pansion does not appear in the listing. However, on the next non-empty source line, the OPT directive is used again to turn on printing of macro expansions and turn off the dis- play of macro definitions (NOMD). Line 68 of the listing contains an ORG directive which sets up the initial value of the runt- ime location counter to $200. The memory space and counter value are shown to the right of the line number column. If an overlay had been defined here (see Chapter 4), the load memory space and location counter would appear to the right of the runtime space and counter value. The line numbers then skip to line 151 which contains a call to the macro DITFFT. The macro was not defined in this source file but its definition was read from an external file in a macro library directory as specified by the prior MACLIB directive. The skipped line numbers represent that definition, which does not appear due to the previ- ously given NOMD option. Line 203 illustrates several listing features of the Assembler. The plus sign (+) to the right of the line number column indicates a macro expansion in progress. The next field is the memory space and location counter value, followed by the encoded instruction. The mne- monic and operand fields are spread out for easier reading. The ‘00000227’ by itself on line 204 is the loop address for the DO loop; it is stored in the second instruction word and represents one less than the address of the label _end_pass. On page 7 there are two errors reported in the listing. Error messages contain the listing line number, the source file name and the source line number where the error occurred, a severity level (WARNING, ERROR, or FATAL), and the message text. In addition, the error message may contain extra information indicating erroneous symbols or the field (Label, Opcode, Operand, Opcode 2, Operand 2, X Move, Y Move) where the error oc- curred. Page 8 is the end of the source statement listing. After the END directive at line 232, the Assembler reports the total number of errors and warnings it encountered during the assembly process. After the source listing, the Assembler records other information encountered during as- sembly. On page 9 the names of the two macros used in the program are listed, along with their definition lines in the source listing. If any sections had been declared in the pro- D-2 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Assembler Listing File Format Cross-reference Format gram they would be shown here, as well as define symbols and their corresponding sub- stitution strings. Next the symbol table is output, sorted by symbol name. The symbol table data includes the symbol type (integer, floating point), its value, the section where it was defined if applicable, and any attributes it may have (LOCAL, GLOBAL, SET). Figure D-3 contains an annotated Assembler listing line showing virtually every possible listing field. The significance of some fields may require further explanation. The macro definition/expansion column will contain a plus sign (+) during macro expansion. It will contain a lower case ‘m’ during macro definition, and a lower case ‘d’ during data constant expansion (the CEX option used with the DC directive). When a nested macro is expand- ed, this column will contain both a lower case ‘m’ and a plus sign. A lower case ‘i’ in this column indicates that the line has been skipped as a result of an IF-THEN-ELSE directive sequence. A lower case ‘p’ means that the line was automatically generated by the As- sembler, ordinarily to introduce pipeline delay. D.3 CROSS-REFERENCE FORMAT The Assembler will optionally generate a cross-reference listing of all symbols used in the source program. This can be done by using the CEX option of the OPT directive (Chapter 6). The cross-reference listing for the above sample program is shown in Figure D-2. It contains a sorted table of symbols, each one followed by a list of line numbers in the source listing where a reference to the symbol occurred. Line numbers followed by an as- terisk (*) indicate the line where the symbol was defined. D.4 MEMORY UTILIZATION REPORT FORMAT The Assembler can optionally record and report allocation and usage of the separate memory spaces of the target DSP. This is done with the MU option of the OPT directive (Chapter 6). A memory utilization report is a memory map showing data allocation, code generation, and unused memory areas along with associated label, section, and overlay information, if available. Figure D-4 shows the memory utilization report for the Assembler source in Figure D-5. The individual X, Y, L, and P memory spaces are reported separately. The starting and ending addresses, length, type, and any label, section, or overlay data are display for each reported block. The blocks are delimited by the occurrence in the source of either a data allocation directive (BSC, DC, DS, DSM, DSR) or an ORG directive. In the X memory report of Figure D-4 the first reported block is an uninitialized area of 1024 words. This corresponds to the first DS directive in Figure D-5, which reserves 1024 words of memory in X data space. The next block of memory in X data space is the overlay code for the FIR filter. It begins immediately after the first block and is ten words long. The type column shows what kind of code or data has been generated, as well as indicat- ing that a block is unused. In the line corresponding to the first DS directive in the source, the type is DATA to indicate that it is an uninitialized data area. There are other types for initialized data, code, and modulo and reverse carry buffers. For example, the second MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL D-3 Assembler Listing File Format Memory Utilization Report Format block in the X memory report is of type CODE because it is overlay code to be executed in P memory. The label from the source file is included on the report under the label column, since there was a label associated with the DS directive. If there had been no label, the label column on the report would have been blank. The section and overlay address columns are emp- ty because there is no current section and no overlay in progress at this point in the source. In the next-to-last line of the X memory report (start address $400), there is an entry of type CODE with an overlay address. This is the corresponding load entry for the first line in the P memory report, and indicates that this is an overlay block. Separate report records are generated as a result of the ORG directive in the source which has the form ORG P:,X:$400, signifying an overlay. In the X memory report, the overlay address is P:0 and the R in parentheses means that the overlay address is the runtime address. Conversely, the first line in the P memory report shows an overlay address of X:400; the L in paren- theses means that the overlay address is the load time address. D-4 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Assembler Listing File Format Assembler Listing Format MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL D-5 Assembler Listing File Format Assembler Listing Format D-6 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Assembler Listing File Format Assembler Listing Format MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL D-7 Assembler Listing File Format Assembler Listing Format D-8 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Assembler Listing File Format Assembler Listing Format MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL D-9 Assembler Listing File Format Assembler Listing Format D-10 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Assembler Listing File Format Assembler Listing Format MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL D-11 Assembler Listing File Format Assembler Listing Format D-12 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Assembler Listing File Format Assembler Listing Format MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL D-13 Assembler Listing File Format Assembler Listing Format D-14 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Assembler Listing File Format Assembler Listing Format MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL D-15 Assembler Listing File Format Assembler Listing Format D-16 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Assembler Listing File Format Assembler Listing Format MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL D-17 Assembler Listing File Format Assembler Listing Format D-18 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Appendix E MOTOROLA DSP OBJECT FILE FORMAT (COFF) E.1 INTRODUCTION The Motorola DSP Assembler and Linker produce a binary object file in a modified form of the AT&T Common Object File Format (COFF). COFF is a formal definition for the structure of machine code files. It originated with Unix System V but has sufficient flexibil- ity and generality to be useful in non-hosted environments. In particular, COFF supports user-defined sections and contains extensive information for symbolic software testing and debugging. Later sections describe the COFF implementation for the Motorola family of digital signal processors. The DSP COFF format has been altered to support multiple memory spaces and normalized to promote transportability of object files among host processors. See section E.4 for a list of differences between the Motorola DSP object file format and stan- dard COFF. For a more general discussion of COFF the following reference may be use- ful: Gintaras R. Gircys, Understanding and Using COFF, O’Reilly & Associates, 1988 (ISBN 0-937175-31-5). E.2 OBJECT FILE STRUCTURE A DSP COFF object file consists of up to eight groups of object file information. Some of these groups are optional, depending on the type of object file generated, and others may have repeating occurrences. The basic object file components are: • File header • Optional header • Section headers • Section data • Relocation information • Line numbers • Symbol table • String table MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL E-1 Motorola DSP Object File Format (COFF) Object File Structure The general layout of the object file is illustrated in Figure E-1. FILE HEADER OPTIONAL HEADER Section 1 Header • • Section n Header Section 1 Contents • • Section n Contents Section 1 Relocation Info • • Section n Relocation Info Section 1 Line Numbers • • Section n Line Numbers SYMBOL TABLE STRING TABLE Figure E-1 COFF File Basic Structure The file header contains object file information such as timestamp, number of sections, pointer to the symbol table, and file status flags. Depending on how the object file was generated the optional header holds link or run time information. The optional header is followed by a list of section headers. Each section header contains pointers to section da- ta, relocation information, and line number entries. After the section headers comes the raw data for all sections. If the object file is relocatable the raw data may be followed by a block of relocation entries for all sections. If the original source file was compiled or as- sembled with the -G debug option, the relocation information is followed by source line number address entries. The symbol table contains information on program symbols use- ful by both the Linker and the debugger. The string table may contain very long symbolic names, comment text, or relocation expressions. Note that the last four groups (relocation info, line number entries, symbol table, and string table) may not appear if the Linker -S option is used to strip symbols from the object file. E-2 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Motorola DSP Object File Format (COFF) Object File Components E.3 OBJECT FILE COMPONENTS Following are detailed descriptions of each of the DSP COFF object file components. The descriptions include the purpose of the component, its structure in the object file, and meanings of individual fields within the component. E.3.1 File Header The file header is the first component in a COFF object file. It contains information about the object file itself and is used for negotiating other components within the file. There is only one file header per object file. Figure E-2 shows the structure of the COFF file header. Bytes Declaration Name Description 0-3 unsigned long f_magic Magic number 4-7 unsigned long f_nscns Number of sections 8-11 long int f_timdat Time and date when file was created 12-15 long int f_symptr File pointer to the start of the symbol table 16-19 long int f_nsyms Number of symbol table entries 20-23 unsigned long f_opthdr Number of bytes in the optional header 24-27 unsigned long f_flags Flags (see Figure E-3) Figure E-2 File Header Format The magic number is a special code indicating the target machine for the object file (DSP56000, DSP96000, etc.). The number of sections is useful for scanning the list of section headers. The date and time stamp is kept in binary form and may contain a host- dependent time value. The f_symptr field contains a file byte offset to the beginning of the symbol table. The number of symbol table entries provides an upper bound for loop- ing through the symbol table and an indirect means for accessing the start of the string table. The size of the optional header allows for jumping to the start of the section header list. MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL E-3 Motorola DSP Object File Format (COFF) Object File Components The flags field is a set of bit flags which convey status information about the object file. It is used primarily by Linkers, debuggers, and other loader software to determine whether the file is valid for a particular requested operation. The individual bit flags are shown in Figure E-3. Mnemonic Flag Meaning F_RELFLG 0000001 Relocation information stripped from file F_EXEC 0000002 File is executable (no unresolved external references) F_LNNO 0000004 Line numbers stripped from file F_LSYMS 0000010 Local symbols stripped from file F_CC 0010000 File produced by C compiler (Motorola DSP only) Figure E-3 File Header Flags E.3.2 Optional Header The COFF optional header ordinarily is used to hold system-dependent or runtime infor- mation. This allows different operating environments to store data that only that environ- ment uses without forcing all COFF files to save space for that information. General utility programs can be made to work properly with any common object file. This is done by seeking past the optional header using the f_opthdr size field in the file header record. The optional header in a Motorola DSP object file may contain two distinct types of infor- mation, depending upon how the file was generated. If the file is a relocatable object file it will have an optional header containing Linker information. If the file is an absolute object file it will have an optional header containing runtime information. The runtime header is similar to standard COFF a.out optional header formats. Figure E-4 shows the Linker optional header. The module size field gives the size of the entire object module. The data size field reflects the size of the entire raw data block within the module. The endstr field points to an expression in the string table which originated with the Assembler END directive (see Chapter 6); it indicates the starting address of the module. If this field is negative or zero there is no end expression. The logical section count is the count of sections in the object module created via the Assembler SECTION directive (see Chapter 6). The counter count represents the number of COFF sections in the file (analogous to the file header f_nscns field). The relocation entry and line number counts hold the number of all relocation entries and line number records in the file. The E-4 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Motorola DSP Object File Format (COFF) Object File Components buffer and overlay counts give counts for each instance of a buffer or overlay in the mod- ule. The major version, minor version, and revision number fields reflect the Assembler and Linker versions to insure Linker backward compatibility. The optional header flags hold special mode flags for the Linker. Bytes Declaration Name Description 0-3 long int modsize Object module size 4-7 long int datasize Module raw data size 8-11 long int endstr End directive expression string 12-15 long int secnt Logical section count 16-19 long int ctrcnt Counter count 20-23 long int relocnt Relocation entry count 24-27 long int lnocnt LIne number entry count 28-31 long int bufcnt Buffer count 32-35 long int ovlcnt Overlay count 36-39 long int majver Major version number 40-43 long int minver Minor version number 44-47 long int revno Revision number 48-51 long int optflags Optional header flags Figure E-4 Motorola DSP Optional Link Header Format Figure E-5 illustrates the runtime optional header. This header is similar to the standard COFF a.out header but there are differences. The magic number in this header is not the same as the magic number in the file header; this magic number is used indicate the file type to a host operating system. The magic number and version stamp fields currently are not used by the Motorola DSP tools and are set to zero. The text size field gives the size of all text-type data (executable code) in the object file. The data size field holds a count of all initialized data (apart from code) in the file. The uninitialized data size field is not used and is set to zero. MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL E-5 Motorola DSP Object File Format (COFF) Object File Components The program entry field represents the address given in the Assembler END directive. The text start and data start values contain the low addresses for text and data segments, respectively. The text and data end values contain the high addresses for text and data segments, respectively. Note that addresses are expressed in terms of the C language typedef CORE_ADDR. A CORE_ADDR is a structure containing a long (4 byte) address and an enumeration type which classifies the address according to memory space (X, Y, L, P) and memory mapping (internal, external, etc.). See section E.4.1 for more informa- tion on the CORE_ADDR structure. Bytes Declaration Name Description 0-3 long int magic Magic number 4-7 long int vstamp Version stamp 8-11 long int tsize Size of text in words 12-15 long int dsize Size of data in words 16-19 long int bsize Size of uninitialized data in words 20-27 CORE_ADDR entry Program entry point 28-35 CORE_ADDR text_start Base address of text 36-43 CORE_ADDR data_start Base address of data 44-51 CORE_ADDR text_end End address of text 52-59 CORE_ADDR data_end End address of data Figure E-5 Motorola DSP Optional Runtime Header Format E.3.3 Sections A section is the smallest portion of an object file that is treated as one separate and distinct entity. Sections can accommodate program text, initialized and uninitialized data, and block data. COFF sections in DSP object files may be grouped under a logical section de- fined by the Assembler SECTION directive (see Chapter 6). It is a mistake to assume that every COFF file will have a specific number of sections, or to assume characteristics of sections such as their order, their location in the object file, or the address at which they are to be loaded. This information is available only after the E-6 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Motorola DSP Object File Format (COFF) Object File Components object file has been created. Programs manipulating COFF files should obtain it from file and section headers in the file. E.3.3.1 Section Headers Every object file has a table of section headers to specify the layout of data within the file. The section header table consists of one entry for every section in the file. The information in the section header is described in Figure E-6. Bytes Declaration Name Description 0-7 char s_name Section name (null padded) 8-15 CORE_ADDR s_paddr Physical address 16-23 CORE_ADDR s_vaddr Virtual address 24-27 long int s_size Section size in words 28-31 long int s_scnptr File pointer to raw data 32-35 long int s_relptr File pointer to relocation entries 36-39 long int s_lnnoptr File pointer to line number entries 40-43 unsigned long s_nreloc Number of relocation entries 44-47 unsigned long s_nlnno Number of line number entries 48-51 long int s_flags Section flags (see Figure E-7) Figure E-6 Section Header Format The section name is an 8-byte character array padded with null (zero) bytes if required. In Motorola relocatable object files section names may be longer than eight characters. In this case the convention used for long symbol names is followed where if the least signif- icant four bytes of the section name field contain zeroes, the name is in the symbol table at the offset given by the most significant four bytes of the name field. See section E.3.4.1 for more information on the handling of long symbol names. The physical address is the address where the section text or data will reside in memory. The address value depends upon whether the section is absolute or relocatable. If the section is absolute then the physical address is the actual address where the section will be loaded into memory. If the section is relocatable then the physical address is an offset MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL E-7 Motorola DSP Object File Format (COFF) Object File Components from the start of the logical section (implicit or defined by the SECTION directive) in which the section is defined. In most cases the virtual address is the same as the physical address. However, for block data sections in Motorola DSP object files the virtual address field holds the repeat count for the single raw data value associated with this section. For example, if the assembly language source file included a directive of the form BSC $400,$FFFF the s_vaddr field would contain the value $400, the s_size field would be 1 (or 2 if in L memory), and the single raw data word associated with the section would be $FFFF. The section size is the count of raw data words associated with the section. This is in con- trast to standard COFF section sizes which usually are given in bytes. Raw data words currently are stored in the object file as long (4-byte) integers independent of the target processor word size. The file pointer fields are file byte offsets into the object file to the start of the current sec- tion raw data, relocation entries, and line number information. The counts of relocation and line number entries provide an upper bound for scanning these tables. The section flags comprise the section attributes and are described in Figure E-7. E-8 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Motorola DSP Object File Format (COFF) Object File Components Mnemonic Flag Meaning STYP_REG $0000 Regular section STYP_DSECT $0001 Dummy section STYP_NOLOAD $0002 Noload section STYP_GROUP $0004 Grouped section STYP_PAD $0008 Padding section STYP_COPY $0010 Copy section STYP_TEXT $0020 Executable text section STYP_DATA $0040 Initialized data section STYP_BSS $0080 Uninitialized data section STYP_BLOCK $0400 Block data section STYP_OVERLAY $0800 Overlay section STYP_MACRO $1000 Macro section Figure E-7 Section Header Flags Text sections are reserved for code to be loaded into program memory (P space). Data sections hold initialized data, generated by Assembler DC directives for example, bound for data (X, Y, L) memory. Bss sections are used for uninitialized blocks resulting from As- sembler DS and similar directives. Padding sections are generated to provide alignment when a modulo or reverse-carry buffer is declared. The block section attribute flags a block data section, described above. The overlay flag indicates the section is part of an overlay. Macro sections represent code and data generated during a macro expansion. Dummy sections are used internally by the Assembler to mark empty sections after the first assembly pass. Empty sections may still appear in the object file if a symbol is asso- ciated with a section which contains no data. The noload, group, and copy attributes are not used at present. E.3.3.2 Relocation Information Object files have one relocation entry for each relocatable reference in the text or data. The relocation information consists of entries with the format described in Figure E-8. MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL E-9 Motorola DSP Object File Format (COFF) Object File Components Bytes Declaration Name Description 0-3 long r_vaddr Address of reference 4-7 long r_symndx String table index 8-11 unsigned long r_type Relocation type Figure E-8 Relocation Entry Format The address field represents the relocatable address within the section raw data where a modification is needed. In standard COFF the r_symndx field points to an entry in the symbol table corresponding to the reference requiring modification. The relocation type encodes how the raw data is to be changed to reflect the resolved symbol value. In Motorola DSP COFF r_symndx is an offset into the string table which points to a relo- cation expression. The Linker interprets this expression and updates the word at r_vaddr with the result of the expression evaluation. The relocation type is always zero. See sec- tion E.5, Object File Data Expression Format for more information on relocation expres- sions. E.3.3.3 Line Numbers When the compiler or Assembler is invoked with the -G debug option an entry is made in the object for every source line where a breakpoint can be inserted. It is then possible to reference source line numbers when using a debugger. The structure of an object file line entry is shown in Figure E-9. Bytes Declaration Name Description 0-3 long l_symndx Function name symbol table index 0-7 CORE_ADDR l_paddr Line number physical address 8-11 unsigned long l_lnno Source file line number Figure E-9 Line Number Entry Format All line numbers in a section are grouped by function as shown in Figure E-10. The first entry in a function grouping has line number 0 and has, in place of the physical address, E-10 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Motorola DSP Object File Format (COFF) Object File Components an index into the symbol table for the entry containing the function name. Subsequent en- tries have actual line numbers and addresses of the program text corresponding to the line numbers. The line number entries are relative to the beginning of the function, and appear in increasing order of address. Symbol index 0 Physical address Line number Physical address Line number ...... Symbol index 0 Physical address Line number Physical address Line number Figure E-10 Line Number Grouping E.3.4 Symbol Table The COFF symbol table serves a dual purpose: it provides resolution for symbolic refer- ences in relocation expressions during linking, and it establishes a framework for the han- dling of symbolic debug information. The symbol table consists of at least one fixed- length entry per symbol with some symbols followed by auxiliary entries of the same size. Because of symbolic debugging requirements the order of symbols in the symbol table is very important. Whereas an individual symbol table entry can completely describe a single debugging entity, the entities exist within the framework of the source language that pro- duced them. For example, symbol scoping and function blocks in C are represented by the appropriate ordering of begin-end block entries in the symbol table. Symbols in the symbol table appear in the sequence shown in Figure E-11. MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL E-11 Motorola DSP Object File Format (COFF) Object File Components Filename 1 Function 1 Local symbols for function 1 Function 2 Local symbols for function 2 . . . Statics . . . Filename 2 Function 1 Local symbols for function 1 . . . Statics . . . Defined global symbols Undefined global symbols Figure E-11 COFF Symbol Table Ordering The entry for each symbol is a structure that holds the symbol value, its type, and other information. There are symbol table entries used for relocation and linking and there are special symbols used only for debugging. The two kinds of entries are distinguished by combinations of field values in the symbol record. The structure of a symbol table entry is illustrated in Figure E-12. E-12 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Motorola DSP Object File Format (COFF) Object File Components Bytes Declaration Name Description 0-7 char n_name Symbol name (null padded) 0-3 long int n_zeroes Zero in this field indicates name is in string table 4-7 long int n_offset Offset of name in string table 8-15 CORE_ADDR n_address Symbol address value 8-15 unsigned long n_val[2] Symbol value 16-19 long int n_scnum Symbol section number 20-23 unsigned long n_type Symbol basic and derived type 24-27 long int n_sclass Symbol storage class 28-31 long int n_numaux Number of auxiliary entries Figure E-12 Symbol Table Entry Format E.3.4.1 Symbol Name The first eight bytes in the symbol table entry are a union of a character array and two longs. If the symbol name is seven characters or less, the null-padded symbol name is stored there. If the symbol name is longer than seven characters, then the entire symbol name is stored in the string table. In this case, the eight bytes contain two long integers: the first is zero and the second is the offset (relative to the beginning of the string table) of the name in the string table. Since there can be no symbols with a null name, the ze- roes on the first four bytes serve to distinguish a symbol table entry with an offset from one with a name in the first eight bytes. E.3.4.2 Symbol Value The symbol value is a union of a CORE_ADDR typedef and an array of two longs. If the symbol value is an address the contents will be stored as a CORE_ADDR structure with memory and mapping attributes. Otherwise the contents are stored in the n_val field. Whether the symbol value is an address or not depends on the storage class of the sym- bol. See section E.3.4.5 for more information on the relationship of symbol value and stor- age class. MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL E-13 Motorola DSP Object File Format (COFF) Object File Components E.3.4.3 Section Number The section number maps a symbol to its corresponding section in the object file (e.g. the section in which the symbol is defined). A special section number (-2) marks symbolic debugging symbols, including structure/union/enumeration tag names, typedefs, and the name of the file. A section number of -1 indicates that the symbol has a value but is not relocatable. Examples of absolute-valued symbols include automatic and register vari- ables, function arguments, and end-of-structure symbols. A section number of 0 flags a relocatable external symbol that is not defined in the current file. Section numbers greater than zero correlate to the ordinal sequence of sections in the object file. E.3.4.4 Symbol Type The type field in the symbol table entry contains information about the basic and derived type for the symbol. This information is generated by the compiler and Assembler only if the -G debug option is used. Each symbol has exactly one basic or fundamental type but can have more than one derived type. The type information is encoded as sets of bits in the field. Bits 0 through 3 hold one of the fundamental type values given in Figure E-13. E-14 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Motorola DSP Object File Format (COFF) Object File Components Mnemonic Value Type T_NULL 0 Type not assigned T_VOID 1 Void T_CHAR 2 Character T_SHORT 3 Short integer T_INT 4 Integer T_LONG 5 Long integer T_FLOAT 6 Floating point T_DOUBLE 7 Double word floating point T_STRUCT 8 Structure T_UNION 9 Union T_ENUM 10 Enumeration T_MOE 11 Member of enumeration T_UCHAR 12 Unsigned character T_USHORT 13 Unsigned short T_UINT 14 Unsigned integer T_ULONG 15 Unsigned long Figure E-13 Fundamental Types Bits 4 through 15 are arranged as six 2-bit subfields. These subfields represent levels of the derived types given in Figure E-14. MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL E-15 Motorola DSP Object File Format (COFF) Object File Components Mnemonic Value Type DT_NON 0 No derived type DT_PTR 1 Pointer DT_FCN 2 Function DT_ARY 3 Array Figure E-14 Derived Types As an example of encoding fundamental and derived types, consider a function returning a pointer to a character. The fundamental type is character, giving bits 0-3 of the symbol type field the value 2. Bits 4-5 would hold a 2 for the derived type of function and bits 6-7 would contain a 1 for the pointer derived type. The value in the symbol entry type field would result in %01100010 binary, or $62 hexadecimal. E.3.4.5 Symbol Storage Class The symbol storage class indicates how a symbol will be used during execution or debug- ging. Some storage classes actually reflect how a symbol will be stored, e.g. as a register parameter. Other storage classes provide information for special symbols used in debug- ging, such as the beginning of blocks or the end of functions. Storage classes are outlined in Figure E-15. E-16 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Motorola DSP Object File Format (COFF) Object File Components Mnemonic Value Type C_EFCN -1 Physical end of function C_NULL 0 No storage class C_AUTO 1 Automatic variable C_EXT 2 External symbol C_STAT 3 Static symbol C_REG 4 Register variable C_EXTDEF 5 External definition C_LABEL 6 Label C_ULABEL 7 Undefined label C_MOS 8 Member of structure C_ARG 9 Function argument C_STRTAG 10 Structure tag C_MOU 11 Member of union C_UNTAG 12 Union tag C_TPDEF 13 Type definition C_USTATIC 14 Uninitialized static C_ENTAG 15 Enumeration tag C_MOE 16 Member of enumeration C_REGPARAM 17 Register parameter C_FIELD 18 Bit field Figure E-15 Storage Classes MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL E-17 Motorola DSP Object File Format (COFF) Object File Components Mnemonic Value Type C_BLOCK 100 Beginning and end of block C_FCN 101 Beginning and end of function C_EOS 102 End of structure C_FILE 103 C language source filename C_LINE 104 - C_ALIAS 105 Duplicated tag C_HIDDEN 106 - A_FILE 200 Assembly source filename A_SECT 201 Beginning and end of section A_BLOCK 202 Beginning/end of COFF section A_MACRO 203 Macro expansion A_GLOBAL 210 Global assembly language symbol A_XDEF 211 XDEFed symbol A_XREF 212 XREFed symbol A_SLOCAL 213 Section local label A_ULOCAL 214 Underscore local label A_MLOCAL 215 Macro local label Figure E-15 Storage Classes (continued) The value of a symbol depends on its storage class. This relationship is summarized in Figure E-16. E-18 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Motorola DSP Object File Format (COFF) Object File Components Storage Class Value C_AUTO Stack offset in words C_EXT Relocatable address C_STAT Relocatable address C_REG Register number C_LABEL Relocatable address C_MOS Offset in words C_ARG Stack offset in words C_STRTAG 0 C_MOU 0 C_UNTAG 0 C_TPDEF 0 C_ENTAG 0 C_MOE Enumeration value C_REGPARAM Register number C_FIELD Bit displacement C_BLOCK Relocatable address C_FCN Relocatable address C_EOS Size of structure in words C_FILE (see below) C_ALIAS Tag index C_HIDDEN Relocatable address Figure E-16 Storage Class and Value MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL E-19 Motorola DSP Object File Format (COFF) Object File Components Storage Class Value A_FILE (see below) A_SECT String table offset to section name A_BLOCK Relocatable address A_MACRO String table offset to macro name A_GLOBAL Relocatable address A_XDEF Relocatable address A_XREF String table offset to symbol name A_SLOCAL Relocatable address A_ULOCAL Relocatable address A_MLOCAL Relocatable address Figure E-16 Storage Class and Value (continued) If a symbol has storage class C_FILE or A_FILE, the value of that symbol equals the sym- bol table entry index of the next C_FILE or A_FILE symbol. That is, the C_FILE and A_FILE entries form a one-way linked list in the symbol table. If there are no more C_FILE or A_FILE entries in the symbol table, the value of the symbol is the index of the first global symbol. Relocatable symbols have a value equal to the relocatable address of that symbol. When the section is relocated by the Linker, the value of these symbols changes. E.3.4.6 Auxiliary Entries Every symbol table entry may have zero, one, or more auxiliary entries. These auxiliary entries are used to hold additional information about the primary symbol. The number of auxiliary entries associated with a given symbol can be determined by examining the n_numaux field of the main symbol entry. An auxiliary symbol table entry contains the same number of bytes as its associated sym- bol table entry and is contiguous with the primary entry in the object file. Unlike primary symbol table entries, however, the format of an auxiliary entry depends on the type and storage class of the main symbol. E-20 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Motorola DSP Object File Format (COFF) Object File Components E.3.4.6.1 Filenames The auxiliary table entry for a filename contains a 14-character array followed by an un- signed long integer. If the integer is zero then the filename is in the array. Otherwise it is in the string table at the offset given by the integer value. The x_ftype field indicates the memory space used for the stack in compiled modules. Bytes Declaration Name Description 0-13 char x_fname Source file name 14-17 unsigned long x_foff String table offset to file name 18-21 unsigned long x_ftype Memory space used by stack Figure E-17 Filename Symbol Auxiliary Entry E.3.4.6.2 Sections Section auxiliary entries have the format shown in Figure E-18. This information is analo- gous to selected fields in the corresponding section header. If the object file is relocatable a section symbol entry will have a second auxiliary entry with the format shown in Figure E-19. Bytes Declaration Name Description 0-3 long int x_scnlen Section length 4-7 unsigned long x_nreloc Number of relocation entries 8-11 unsigned long x_nlinno Number of line numbers 12-31 - - Unused (zero filled) Figure E-18 Section Symbol Auxiliary Entry MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL E-21 Motorola DSP Object File Format (COFF) Object File Components Bytes Declaration Name Description 0-3 long int secno Logical section number 4-7 long int rsecno Logical relocation section number 8-11 long int flags Section type flags 12-27 struct mematt mem Section memory attributes 28-31 - - Unused (zero filled) Figure E-19 Relocatable Section Auxiliary Entry The logical section number is the ordinal related to a SECTION directive in the Assembler source file. The relocation section number usually is the same as the logical section num- ber, but may be different if the logical section is static within an enclosing section. The memory mapping is an alternate encoding of the CORE_ADDR information in the section header. Section type flags indicate whether this COFF section represents a buffer or over- lay block. If the current COFF section is a buffer or overlay block a third auxiliary entry is produced. The layout of that entry is shown in Figure E-19. Bytes Declaration Name Description 0-3 long int bufcnt Buffer section number 4-7 long int buftyp Buffer type 8-11 long int buflim Buffer limit 0-15 struct mematt ovlmem Overlay memory attributes 16-19 long int ovlcnt Overlay section number 20-23 long int ovlstr Overlay origin expression 24-31 - - Unused (zero filled) Figure E-20 Relocatable Buffer/Overlay Auxiliary Entry Buffers and overlays are generally mutually exclusive so their respective fields share stor- age space in the record definition. In the case where a buffer appears in an overlay, an- E-22 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Motorola DSP Object File Format (COFF) Object File Components other auxiliary entry is generated for the buffer. The buffer section number is really the buffer instance count in this file. Buffer type is either modulo or reverse carry. The buffer limit gives the upper bound for the buffer size even though the block may contain less ini- tialized data than this limit suggests. The overlay memory structure gives the runtime memory attributes for this block. The overlay section number is really the overlay instance count in this file. The overlay origin expression is the expression given for the runtime counter in the Assembler ORG directive (see Chapter 6). E.3.4.6.3 Tag Names Auxiliary entries for C language structure and union tag names have the format described in Figure E-21. Note that in Motorola DSP COFF the size of the associated structure or union is in words as opposed to bytes as in standard COFF. The x_endndx field is used to create a linked list of tag name entries through the symbol table. Bytes Declaration Name Description 0-7 - - Unused (zero filled) 8-11 unsigned long x_size Size of structure, union, or enumeration in words 12-15 - - Unused (zero filled) 16-19 long int x_endndx Index of next structure, union, or enumeration entry 20-31 - - Unused (zero filled) Figure E-21 Tag Name Symbol Auxiliary Entry E.3.4.6.4 End of Structures The format for C language end-of-structure auxiliary entries is given in Figure E-22. Note that the size of the structure, union, or enumeration is given in words rather than bytes. The tag index holds the symbol table index for the tag record associated with this struc- ture. MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL E-23 Motorola DSP Object File Format (COFF) Object File Components Bytes Declaration Name Description 0-3 long int x_tagndx Tag index 4-7 - - Unused (zero filled) 8-11 unsigned long x_size Size of structure, union, or enumeration in words 12-31 - - Unused (zero filled) Figure E-22 End of Structure Auxiliary Entry E.3.4.6.5 Functions Function auxiliary entries have the format shown in Figure E-23. Note that the size of the function is given in words rather than bytes. The function tag index holds the symbol table index to the begin-function symbol for this function. The x_endndx field points to the next function symbol table entry. The x_lnnoptr field contains a byte offset pointer within the object file to the line number entry that signals the start of this function (see section E.3.3.3, Line Numbers, for more information). Bytes Declaration Name Description 0-3 long int x_tagndx Tag index 4-7 long int x_fsize Size of function in words 8-11 - - Unused (zero filled) 12-15 long int x_lnnoptr File pointer to line number entry 16-19 long int x_endndx Index of next function entry 20-31 - - Unused (zero filled) Figure E-23 Function Symbol Auxiliary Entry E-24 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Motorola DSP Object File Format (COFF) Object File Components E.3.4.6.6 Arrays The format for C language array auxiliary entries is given in Figure E-24. The tag index contains the offset to the next array symbol in the symbol table. The line number field gives the source file line number for the array declaration. Bytes Declaration Name Description 0-3 long int x_tagndx Tag index 4-7 unsigned long x_lnno Line number of array declaration 8-11 unsigned long x_size Size of array 12-15 unsigned long x_dimen[0] First array dimension 16-19 unsigned long x_dimen[1] Second array dimension 20-23 unsigned long x_dimen[2] Third array dimension 24-27 unsigned long x_dimen[3] Fourth array dimension 28-31 - - Unused (zero filled) Figure E-24 Array Symbol Auxiliary Entry E.3.4.6.7 End of Blocks and Functions The format for C language symbol entries for the end of blocks and functions is given in Figure E-25. Only the source file line number for the end of the block or function is stored. Bytes Declaration Name Description 0-3 - - Unused (zero filled) 4-7 unsigned long x_lnno Source file line number 8-31 - - Unused (zero filled) Figure E-25 End of Block or Function Auxiliary Entry MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL E-25 Motorola DSP Object File Format (COFF) Object File Components E.3.4.6.8 Beginning of Blocks and Functions The format for C language symbol entries for the beginning of blocks and functions is de- scribed in Figure E-26. The source file line number is retained. The x_endndx provides a link to the next beginning of block or function symbol in the symbol table. Bytes Declaration Name Description 0-3 - - Unused (zero filled) 4-7 unsigned long x_lnno Source file line number 8-15 - - Unused (zero filled) 16-19 long int x_endndx Index of next beginning of block or function 20-23 unsigned long x_type Function prologue/epilogue index 24-31 - - Unused (zero filled) Figure E-26 Beginning of Block or Function Auxiliary Entry E.3.4.6.9 Structure, Union, and Enumeration Names The format for auxiliary entries related to structure, union, and enumeration names is giv- en in Figure E-27. The tag index is used to access the tag symbol record that describes this structure. Note that in Motorola DSP COFF the size of the associated structure or union is in words as opposed to bytes as in standard COFF. E-26 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Motorola DSP Object File Format (COFF) Differences In DSP Object Format And Standard COFF Bytes Declaration Name Description 0-3 long int x_tagndx Tag index 4-7 - - Unused (zero filled) 8-11 unsigned long x_size Size of structure, union, or enumeration in words 12-31 - - Unused (zero filled) Figure E-27 Structure, Union, or Enumeration Name Auxiliary Entry E.3.4.7 Object File Comments Object file comments are stored in a single COFF symbol table entry. The symbol name field contains the special comment string .cmt. The n_address field points to the com- ment text as an offset into the string table. Comments generated automatically by the As- sembler or via the IDENT directive have an n_scnum field with value of -1. Comments produced with the COBJ directive generally have the section number of the COFF section in which they reside. The type and storage class fields are both zero. E.3.5 String Table Symbol and section names longer than seven characters and comment text are stored contiguously in the string table with each string delimited by a zero byte. The first four bytes represent the size of the string table in bytes; offsets into the string table, therefore, are always greater than or equal to 4. An empty string table has a length field with value zero. E.4 DIFFERENCES IN DSP OBJECT FORMAT AND STANDARD COFF Motorola DSP COFF is substantially the same as generic COFF and usage of format el- ements is similar. However, the original COFF specification did not envision aspects of machine architecture which the Motorola DSP family possesses. Moreover, standard COFF encompasses a file format which is quite adaptable among host processors, but is not necessarily portable among those hosts. It is straightforward enough to adapt COFF to a new host machine, but the intent is that the derived host format will be recognized and executed only on that target host. For Motorola DSP COFF the format had to be extended for cross-development such that a given object file would be usable on all targeted host systems. The following sections outline the differences and changes between standard COFF and Motorola DSP COFF. MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL E-27 Motorola DSP Object File Format (COFF) Differences In DSP Object Format And Standard COFF E.4.1 Multiple Memory Spaces Standard COFF has no built-in mechanism for accommodating multiple memory spaces. It does handle the notion of separate text and data sections, and a possible extension would have been to define section types for the new memory areas. This quickly be- comes unwieldy when mapping information (internal, external, port A/B) is considered as well. The solution was to extend addressing information to include the memory and mapping with the address value itself. This is done by defining a C language typedef called CORE_ADDR which holds both the memory and mapping data along with the memory ad- dress. For any address context in the COFF file a CORE_ADDR is used rather than, for example, an unsigned long. A description of the CORE_ADDR format is shown in Figure E-28. Bytes Declaration Name Description 0-3 long w0.l Memory address 4-7 enum w1.mape Memory mapping Figure E-28 CORE_ADDR Format The enumeration values for the memory mapping field are shown in order in Figure E-29. E-28 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Motorola DSP Object File Format (COFF) Differences In DSP Object Format And Standard COFF Mnemonic Value Mnemonic Value memory_map_p 0 memory_map_xa 16 memory_map_x 1 memory_map_xb 17 memory_map_y 2 memory_map_xe 18 memory_map_l 3 memory_map_xi 19 memory_map_none 4 memory_map_xr 20 memory_map_laa 5 memory_map_ya 21 memory_map_lab 6 memory_map_yb 22 memory_map_lba 7 memory_map_ye 23 memory_map_lbb 8 memory_map_yi 24 memory_map_le 9 memory_map_yr 25 memory_map_li 10 memory_map_pt 26 memory_map_pa 11 memory_map_pf 27 memory_map_pb 12 memory_map_emi 28 memory_map_pe 13 memory_map_e0-63 29-92 memory_map_pi 14 memory_map_error 666666 memory_map_pr 15 Figure E-29 Memory Mapping Enumerations E.4.2 Object File Transportability There are many different structure definitions in the COFF specification. These definitions consist of fields comprised of varying C data types. These data types are recognized by any reasonable C compiler, but their characteristics and sizes may change from machine to machine. This is acceptable if the COFF files are to be used only on a particular ma- chine architecture. But if COFF files are produced on one machine to be used on another several problems may arise. One is that since the data fields can vary in size there could be alignment problems when accessing structures or individual fields. Another issue is byte ordering between machines. Given an arbitrary byte stream, some machines store the bytes in a word starting at the least significant bit (LSB) end of the word, while others store bytes starting at the most significant bit (MSB) end of the word. MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL E-29 Motorola DSP Object File Format (COFF) Differences In DSP Object Format And Standard COFF The Motorola DSP version of COFF addresses these potential problems by normalizing the object file. Normalization occurs in a number of ways. All structure and union ele- ments are converted to long values, and raw data is stored in 4-byte quantities indepen- dent of the word size of the target processor. In some cases this wastes space in the object file and in memory but it was considered worth the price for transportability among supported hosts. Also it is not a completely portable solution by any means (e.g. for ma- chines with larger than 4-byte word sizes). The byte ordering issue was dealt with by establishing a baseline ordering, providing com- pliance for foreign hosts with conversion code. This introduces overhead logic on ma- chines that do not support the baseline word order but again it was seen as a reasonable trade-off to insure transportability of object files among development environments. Note that byte swapping logic only comes into play for fields that are not byte-atomic, such as integer fields. Character arrays in structures, for example, should not have their bytes ex- changed. The byte ordering for Motorola DSP COFF is shown in Figure E-30. It adheres to what sometimes is called the big-endian approach to byte and word ordering. Addr n Addr n+1 Addr n+2 Addr n+3 MSB MSB - 1 LSB + 1 LSB Figure E-30 Motorola DSP COFF Byte Ordering E.4.3 Structure Size Fields In some of the COFF data structures there is a size field which gives the size of a block in the target processor environment. For example, there are several symbol table auxil- iary entries that specify the size of a structure or union for debug purposes. In standard COFF these sizes ordinarily are in bytes but in Motorola DSP COFF they are given in words unless otherwise indicated. The use of word sizes for debug entities should be dis- tinguished from file pointer offset values in the object file. File pointers are indeed byte offsets within the object file that are used by utilities to process information in the object file itself. E.4.4 Relocation Information In standard COFF the r_symndx field of any given relocation record points to an entry in the symbol table corresponding to a symbol reference requiring modification. When the standard COFF Linker performs symbol resolution, pairing symbol definitions with match- ing references, it updates the relocation entry to point to the symbol definition and dis- E-30 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Motorola DSP Object File Format (COFF) Object File Data Expression Format cards the reference symbol. When the relocation entries are processed, the resolved symbol value is used to modify the raw data indicated by the relocation entry at r_vaddr. In Motorola DSP COFF r_symndx is an offset into the string table which points to a relo- cation expression. The Linker interprets this expression and updates the entire word at r_vaddr with the result of the expression evaluation. The relocation type is always zero. See section E.5, Object File Data Expression Format for more information on relocation expressions. E.4.5 Block Data Sections Generic COFF does not make allowance for a block data section. A block data section results from use of the Assembler BSC directive, where a large block of memory is initial- ized with a single value. Block data sections are handled in Motorola DSP COFF by mak- ing special use of the section s_vaddr field and adding an informative flag. In most cases the section virtual address is the same as the physical address. However, for block data sections in Motorola DSP object files the virtual address field holds the re- peat count for the single raw data value associated with the section. For example, if the assembly language source file included a directive of the form BSC $400,$FFFF the s_vaddr field would contain the value $400, the s_size field would be 1 (or 2 if in L mem- ory), and the single raw data word associated with the section would be $FFFF. In addi- tion, the STYP_BLOCK flag is set in the section s_flags field. E.4.6 Other Extensions If the object file is relocatable there are extra structures which the Assembler and Linker generate to support special constructs such as logical sections, buffers, and overlays. The optional link file header contains information which the Linker requires; it is described in section E.3.2. Every symbol table entry for a section in a relocatable file has an extra aux- iliary entry described in section E.3.4.6.2. One special DSP COFF structure not documented elsewhere is the comment symbol. A comment symbol table entry is emitted either indirectly via the Assembler IDENT directive or directly with the COBJ directive (see Chapter 6). A comment symbol table entry may be identified by a symbol name of .cmt and a type and storage class of zero. The value field of a comment symbol holds the offset into the string table of the comment text. The section number for a comment symbol produced with the IDENT directive is always -1. Comment symbols generated with the COBJ directive have the section number of the section where the COBJ directive appears in the source file. Comment symbols have no auxiliary entry. E.5 OBJECT FILE DATA EXPRESSION FORMAT Object file data expressions are used in data relocation records to represent values to be loaded into memory. An expression is a combination of symbols, constants, operators, MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL E-31 Motorola DSP Object File Format (COFF) Object File Data Expression Format and parentheses. Expressions may contain user-defined labels, integers, floating point numbers, or literal strings. An object file data expression generally follows the guidelines of Assembler expressions, except that functions are not supported (e.g. they must be evaluated at assembly time), and operators are provided for Linker-specific operations. Also, floating point terms found in these expressions are converted to binary values. E.5.1 Data Expression Generation Link file data expressions are generated when external or relocatable operands are en- countered during assembly or incremental link processing. In most cases the operand ex- pression is copied verbatim from the source and embellished with link evaluation control constructs. For example, consider the source line below: MOVE #FOO,R0 The DSP96000 Assembler produces the following encoding for this line in the object file: $3A8D2000 {FOO}@0#0 Since the symbol FOO is not known to the Assembler it generates a two-word instruction and places a relocation reference to the expression in the position of the second instruc- tion word. The braces ({ }) indicate that this is a user expression that should adhere to certain integrity constraints such as those governing absolute and relative terms. Other- wise the braces are treated much like parentheses. The at sign (@) is a binary operator indicating the memory space of the left operand by the right. The pound sign (#) is a binary operator signifying the size in bits of the left operand by the right. More information on these special operators and their operands is given below. Here is another example of data expression generation: JCLR #1,X:LOC,LABEL For this conditional jump the Assembler produces the following object file code: (($02A00481&~(~(~0<<8)<<12))I(({LOC}@1#8&~(~0<<8))<<12)) {LABEL}@0#0 The first expression is evaluated such that the relative address LOC, resolved at link time, is shifted and masked into the middle eight bits of the base instruction word ($02A00481). The expression could have been more complex if the bit number was an external refer- ence. The relative value of the symbol LABEL occupies the second instruction word. E.5.2 Data Expression Interpretation Object file data expressions are similar to standard Assembler expressions which gener- ally follow the rules of algebra and boolean arithmetic. They are written using infix notation in conjunction with unary and binary operators and parentheses. There are also exten- sions to the usual set of Assembler arithmetic and grouping operators. These are control constructs that assist the Linker in determining the size, type, and characteristics of an expression operand. E-32 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Motorola DSP Object File Format (COFF) Object File Data Expression Format E.5.2.1 User Expression - { ... } The curly braces ({ }) delimit a user expression within a data expression. A user expres- sion is that part of a data expression that was written by the programmer and not gener- ated by the Assembler or Linker as part of its control requirements. It is useful to isolate the user expression in order to check for relationships among absolute and relative terms. In all other respects the curly braces behave like parentheses. E.5.2.2 Relocatable Expression - [ ... ] The square brackets ([ ]) are used to enclose a relocatable expression. The value con- tained in the square brackets is an offset from the base of the current section. Usually this grouping operator is placed around the value of an Assembler local label (underscore la- bel) since these symbols do not migrate to the link file. E.5.2.3 Memory Space Operator - @ The at sign (@) is a binary operator that checks the memory space compatibility of the left operand based on the value of the right operand. The right operand can have the follow- ing values: 0=None 1 = X space 2 = Y space 3 = L space 4 = P space 5 = E space 6 = D space The compatibility check is made based on the matrix outlined in section 3.3, Expression Memory Space Attribute. E.5.2.4 Bit Size Operator - # The pound sign (#) is a binary operator used to verify the size in bits of the left operand given the value of the right operand. The following bit sizes and operand type correspon- dences are defined: -1515 - 15-bit signed short offset -88 - 8-bit signed short offset -77 - 7-bit signed short offset -55 - 5-bit signed short offset -19 - 19-bit page address -16 - 16-bit signed short immediate -15 - 15-bit signed short immediate or offset MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL E-33 Motorola DSP Object File Format (COFF) Object File Data Expression Format -7 - 7-bit signed short immediate or offset -6 - 6-bit signed short PC-relative address -5 - 5-bit signed short offset -2 - 6-bit non-zero positive value -1 - Negated immediate shift 0 - DSP word size immediate or absolute 1 - Immediate shift 2 - Even value 5 - 5-bit short absolute 6 - 6-bit short immediate or absolute 7 - 7-bit short immediate, absolute, or offset 8 - 8-bit short immediate or absolute 12 - 12-bit short immediate or absolute 13 - 13-bit short immediate or absolute 19 - 19-bit short immediate or absolute 67,69 - 7,9-bit masked I/O short absolute 76 - 6-bit alternate I/O short absolute 85,86,87 - 5,6,7-bit I/O short absolute 100 - Nonzero value 102 - Limited I/O short absolute 105 - 5-bit non-zero immediate 106 - 6-bit non-zero immediate E.5.2.5 Memory Attribute Operator - : The colon (:) is used to assign a memory space and counter encoded in the right operand to the left operand. The low sixteen bits of the right operand contain the counter designa- tor for the left operand. The high sixteen bits contain the memory space designator for the left operand. The value here corresponds to the memory space values given for the memory space operator (@) described above. E.5.2.6 Line Number Operator - ! The exclamation point (!) is a binary operator that associates the source file line number of the left operand to the value of the right operand. The left operand is a decimal value representing the source file line number. The right operand is an arbitrary relocation ex- pression. The line number operator assists the Linker in correlating source line numbers to expression terms which could be evaluated erroneously at link time, e.g. forced oper- ands which do not fit into the instruction word after relocation. E-34 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Motorola DSP Object File Format (COFF) Object File Data Expression Format E.5.2.7 BFxxx Instruction Mask Function - @FBF() The @FBF() function is generated by the Assembler when the mask operand for a bitfield instruction is external. The Assembler passes a relocation expression to the function as an argument. The Linker evaluates the expression in parentheses and adjusts the asso- ciated instruction accordingly. E.5.2.8 Local Relocatable Reference Function - @LRF() The @LRF() function attempts to encapsulate more detail about a relocatable expression than is generated with other operators such as @ and :. Its main purpose is to provide sufficient information for evaluating local relocatable expressions that are referenced out- side a defining context. For example, the Assembler might produce an @LRF() function for a reference to an underscore label that is outside its defining section. The function ar- guments consist of the original relocatable expression, the memory space/mapping value, the location counter designation, the defining and relocation section numbers, and any buffer or overlay sequence numbers associated with the expression. E.5.2.9 Alternate Encoding Function - @ENC() The @ENC() provides two encoding expressions for the same instruction. This is useful in cases where the unknown value of an external operand can affect which expression is used for the final encoding. The function takes four arguments. The first argument to the function is the external operand expression. The second argument is the absolute value beyond which the second encoding expression is used over the first. The third argument is the first encoding expression and the last argument is the second encoding expression. MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL E-35 Appendix F DEVICE-DEPENDENT INFORMATION F.1 INTRODUCTION The Motorola DSP Assemblers are quite similar in terms of functional capabilities. Virtu- ally every Assembler feature is available across all Motorola DSP processor families. The devices for which the Assemblers generate code, however, differ architecturally. For ex- ample, the DSP56000 is a binary fractional machine with a suitably-oriented register and instruction set. The DSP96000 is a floating point processor with floating point instructions and an alternatively-named register set. The following sections describe characteristics that vary among Motorola DSPs and how these differences relate to Assembler use and operation. MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL F-1 Device-dependent Information DSP56000 Information F.2 DSP56000 INFORMATION The Motorola DSP56000 refers to a family of high-speed, low power programmable CMOS processors. The DSP56000 supports 24-bit signed fixed-point fractional arith- metic. F.2.1 Instruction Set Summary DSP56000 instructions can be grouped by function into six types: 1. Arithmetic instructions 2. Logical instructions 3. Bit manipulation instructions 4. Loop instructions 5. Move instructions 6. Program control instructions F-2 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Device-dependent Information DSP56000 Information F.2.1.1 Arithmetic Instructions The DSP56000 instructions used for arithmetic operations are: ABS — Absolute value* ADC — Add long with carry* ADD — Add* ADDL — Shift left then add* ADDR — Shift right then add* ASL — Arithmetic shift accumulator left* ASR — Arithmetic shift accumulator right* CLR — Clear accumulator* CMP — Compare* CMPM — Compare magnitude* DEC — Decrement accumulator DIV — Divide iteration INC — Increment accumulator MAC — Signed multiply-accumulate* MACR — Signed multiply-accumulate and round* MPY — Signed multiply* MPYR — Signed multiply and round* NEG — Negate accumulator* NORM — Normalize accumulator iteration RND — Round accumulator* SBC — Subtract long with carry* SUB — Subtract* SUBL — Shift left then subtract* SUBR — Shift right then subtract* Tcc — Transfer conditionally TFR — Transfer data ALU register* TST — Test* *Instruction allows parallel data move. MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL F-3 Device-dependent Information DSP56000 Information F.2.1.2 Logical Instructions The DSP56000 instructions used for logical operations are: AND — Logical AND* ANDI — AND Immediate with control register EOR — Logical exclusive OR* LSL — Logical shift accumulator left* LSR — Logical shift accumulator right* NOT — Logical complement on accumulator* OR — Logical inclusive OR* ORI — OR immediate with control register ROL — Rotate accumulator left* ROR — Rotate accumulator right* F.2.1.3 Bit Manipulation Instructions The DSP56000 instructions used for bit manipulation are: BCHG — Bit test and change BCLR — Bit test and clear BSET — Bit test and set BTST — Bit test on memory F.2.1.4 Loop Instructions The DSP56000 instructions used for loop operations are: DO — Start hardware loop ENDDO — Exit from hardware loop F.2.1.5 Move Instructions The DSP56000 instructions used for move operations are: LUA — Load updated address MOVE — Move data* MOVEC — Move control register MOVEM — Move program memory MOVEP — Move peripheral data *Instruction allows parallel data move. *Instruction allows parallel data move. F-4 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Device-dependent Information DSP56000 Information F.2.1.6 Program Control Instructions The DSP56000 instructions used for program control are: DEBUG — Enter debug mode DEBUGcc — Enter debug mode conditionally ILLEGAL — Illegal instruction interrupt Jcc — Jump conditionally JCLR — Jump if bit clear JMP — Jump JScc — Jump to subroutine conditionally JSCLR — Jump to subroutine if bit clear JSET — Jump if bit set JSSET — Jump to subroutine if bit set JSR — Jump to subroutine NOP — No operation REP — Repeat next instruction RESET — Reset on-chip peripheral devices RTI — Return from interrupt RTS — Return from subroutine STOP — Stop processing (low power standby) SWI — Software interrupt WAIT — Wait for interrupt (low power standby) MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL F-5 Device-dependent Information DSP56000 Information F.2.2 Register Names and Usage The following DSP56000 register names, in either upper or lower case, cannot be used as symbol names in an assembly language source file: XAAB X0 A0 BA X1 A1 A10 YBB10 Y0 B0 A2 Y1 B1 B2 R0 N0 M0 MR R1 N1 M1 CCR R2 N2 M2 SR R3 N3 M3 LC R4 N4 M4 LA R5 N5 M5 SSH R6 N6 M6 SSL R7 N7 M7 OMR The following DSP56000 registers are used by the Assembler in structured control state- ment processing (Chapter 7): AX0Y0 F-6 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Device-dependent Information DSP56000 Information F.2.3 Condition Code Mnemonics Following are the DSP56000 condition code mnemonics which correspond to the condi- tional instructions based on the CCR condition codes. These tests may be used in an op- erand comparison expression within a structured control statement (Chapter 7). MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL F-7 Device-dependent Information DSP96000 Information F.3 DSP96000 INFORMATION The Motorola DSP96000 refers to a family of dual-port IEEE floating point programmable CMOS processors. The DSP960002 supports IEEE 754 single precision and single ex- tended precision floating point and 32-bit signed and unsigned fixed point arithmetic. F.3.1 Instruction Set Summary DSP96000 instructions can be grouped by function into six types: 1. Arithmetic instructions 2. Logical instructions 3. Bit manipulation instructions 4. Loop instructions 5. Move instructions 6. Program control instructions F.3.1.1 Arithmetic Instructions The DSP96000 instructions used for arithmetic operations are: ABS — Absolute value* ADD — Add* ADDC — Add with carry* ASL — Arithmetic shift left* ASR — Arithmetic shift right* BFIND — Find leading one* CLR — Clear register* CMP — Compare* CMPG — Graphics compare* DEC — Decrement by one* EXT — Sign extend half word* EXTB — Sign extend byte* FABS — Floating point absolute value* FADD — Floating point add* FADDSUB — Floating point add and subtract* FCLR — Clear floating point register* FCMP — Floating point compare* FCMPG — Floating point graphics compare* FCMPM — Floating point magnitude compare* FCOPYS — Floating point copy sign* *Instruction allows parallel data move. F-8 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Device-dependent Information DSP96000 Information FGETMAN — Extract mantissa* FINT — Extract integer* FLOAT — Convert integer to floating point* FLOATU — Unsigned integer to floating point* FLOOR — Extract integer* FMPY — Floating point multiply* FMPY/FADD — Floating point multiply and add* FMPY/FSUB — Floating point multiply and subtract* FMPY/FADDSUB — Floating point multiply and add/subtract* FNEG — Floating point negate* FSCALE — Scale floating point operand* FSEEDD — Reciprocal approximation FSEEDR — Square root reciprocal approximation FSUB — Floating point subtract* FTST — Test floating point operand* GETEXP — Extract exponent* INC — Increment by one* INT — Convert floating point to integer* INTRZ — Convert floating point to integer with round to zero* INTU — Convert floating point to unsigned integer* INTURZ — Convert floating point to unsigned integer with round to zero* JOIN — Join two 16-bit integers* JOINB — Join two 8-bit integers* MPYS — Signed multiply* MPYU — Unsigned multiply* NEG — Negate* NEGC — Negate with carry* RND — Round accumulator* SETW — Set operand* SPLIT — Extract 16-bit integer* SPLITB — Extract 8-bit integer* SUB — Subtract* SUBC — Subtract with carry* TST — Test* *Instruction allows parallel data move. MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL F-9 Device-dependent Information DSP96000 Information F.3.1.2 Logical Instructions The DSP96000 instructions used for logical operations are: AND — Logical AND* ANDC — Logical AND with complement* ANDI — AND Immediate to control register EOR — Logical exclusive OR* LSL — Logical shift left* LSR — Logical shift right* NOT — Logical complement* OR — Logical inclusive OR* ORC — Logical inclusive OR with complement* ORI — OR immediate with control register ROL — Rotate left* ROR — Rotate right* F.3.1.3 Bit Manipulation Instructions The DSP96000 instructions used for bit manipulation are: BCHG — Bit test and change BCLR — Bit test and clear BSET — Bit test and set BTST — Bit test on memory F.3.1.4 Loop Instructions The DSP96000 instructions used for loop operations are: DO — Start hardware loop DOR — Start PC-relative hardware loop ENDDO — Exit from hardware loop *Instruction allows parallel data move. F-10 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Device-dependent Information DSP96000 Information F.3.1.5 Move Instructions The DSP96000 instructions used for move operations are: FTFR — Transfer floating point data ALU register LEA — Load effective address LRA — Load PC-relative address MOVE — Move data* MOVEC — Move control register MOVEI — Move immediate short MOVEM — Move program memory MOVEP — Move peripheral data MOVES — Move absolute short MOVETA — Move data registers and test address* TFR — Transfer data ALU register* *Instruction allows parallel data move. MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL F-11 Device-dependent Information DSP96000 Information F.3.1.6 Program Control Instructions The DSP96000 instructions used for program control are: Bcc — Branch conditionally BRA — Branch always BRCLR — Branch if bit clear BRSET — Branch if bit set BScc — Branch to subroutine conditionally BSCLR — Branch to subroutine if bit clear BSR — Branch to subroutine BSSET — Branch to subroutine if bit set DEBUGcc — Enter debug mode conditionally FBcc — Floating point branch conditionally FBScc — Floating point branch to subroutine conditionally FDEBUGcc — Enter debug mode conditionally FJcc — Floating point jump conditionally FJScc — Floating point jump to subroutine conditionally FTRAPcc — Floating point conditional software interrupt ILLEGAL — Illegal instruction interrupt Jcc — Jump conditionally JCLR — Jump if bit clear JMP — Jump JScc — Jump to subroutine conditionally JSCLR — Jump to subroutine if bit clear JSET — Jump if bit set JSR — Jump to subroutine JSSET — Jump to subroutine if bit set NOP — No operation PFLUSH — Flush program cache PFREE — Free program cache PLOCK — Program cache sector lock PLOCKR — Program cache relative sector lock PUNLOCK — Program cache sector unlock PUNLOCKR — Program cache relative sector unlock REP — Repeat next instruction RESET — Reset on-chip peripheral devices RTI — Return from interrupt RTR — Return from subroutine with restore RTS — Return from subroutine STOP — Stop processing (low power standby) F-12 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Device-dependent Information DSP96000 Information WAIT — Wait for interrupt (low power standby) F.3.2 Register Names and Usage The following DSP96000 register names, in either upper or lower case, cannot be used as symbol names in an assembly language source file: D0 D0.L D0.M D0.H D1 D1.L D1.M D1.H D2 D2.L D2.M D2.H D3 D3.L D3.M D3.H D4 D4.L D4.M D4.H D5 D5.L D5.M D5.H D6 D6.L D6.M D6.H D7 D7.L D7.M D7.H D8 D8.L D8.M D8.H D9 D9.L D9.M D9.H R0 N0 M0 MR R1 N1 M1 CCR R2 N2 M2 SR R3 N3 M3 LC R4 N4 M4 LA R5 N5 M5 SSH R6 N6 M6 SSL R7 N7 M7 OMR The following DSP96000 registers are used by the Assembler in structured control state- ment processing (Chapter 7): D0.L D0.M D4.L D6.L MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL F-13 Device-dependent Information DSP96000 Information F.3.3 Condition Code Mnemonics Following are the DSP96000 condition code mnemonics which correspond to the condi- tional instructions based on the CCR condition codes. These tests may be used in an op- erand comparison expression within a structured control statement (Chapter 7). F-14 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Device-dependent Information DSP56100 Information F.4 DSP56100 INFORMATION The Motorola DSP56100 refers to a family of high-speed, low power programmable CMOS processors. The DSP56100 supports16-bit signed fixed-point fractional and signed and unsigned integer arithmetic. F.4.1 Instruction Set Summary DSP56100 instructions can be grouped by function into six types: 1. Arithmetic instructions 2. Logical instructions 3. Bit manipulation instructions 4. Loop instructions 5. Move instructions 6. Program control instructions F.4.1.1 Arithmetic Instructions The DSP56100 instructions used for arithmetic operations are: ABS — Absolute value* ADC — Add long with carry ADD — Add* ASL — Arithmetic shift accumulator left* ASL4 — 4-bit arithmetic shift accumulator left ASR — Arithmetic shift accumulator right* ASR4 — 4-bit arithmetic shift accumulator right ASR16 — 16-bit arithmetic shift accumulator right CLR — Clear accumulator* CLR24 — Clear 24 MS bits of accumulator* CMP — Compare* CMPM — Compare magnitude* DEC — Decrement accumulator* DEC24 — Decrement 24 MS bits of accumulator* DIV — Divide iteration DMAC — Multiply-accumulate with 16-bit right shift EXT — Sign extend accumulator IMAC — Integer multiply-accumulate IMPY — Integer multiply INC — Increment accumulator* *Instruction allows parallel data move. MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL F-15 Device-dependent Information DSP56100 Information INC24 — Increment 24 MS bits of accumulator* MAC — Signed multiply-accumulate* MACR — Signed multiply-accumulate and round* MACSU — Signed/unsigned multiply-accumulate MACUU — Unsigned multiply-accumulate MPY — Signed multiply* MPYR — Signed multiply and round* MPYSU — Signed/unsigned multiply MPYUU — Unsigned multiply NEG — Negate accumulator NEGC — Negate accumulator with carry* NORM — Normalize accumulator iteration RND — Round accumulator* SBC — Subtract long with carry* SUB — Subtract* SUBL — Shift left then subtract* SWAP — Swap accumulator words Tcc — Transfer conditionally TFR — Transfer data ALU register* TFR2 — Transfer data ALU register TFR3 — Transfer data ALU register TST — Test accumulator* TST2 — Test data ALU register* ZERO — Zero extend accumulator F.4.1.2 Logical Instructions The DSP56100 instructions used for logical operations are: AND — Logical AND* ANDI — AND Immediate with control register EOR — Logical exclusive OR* LSL — Logical shift accumulator left* LSR — Logical shift accumulator right* NOT — Logical complement on accumulator* OR — Logical inclusive OR* ORI — OR immediate with control register ROL — Rotate accumulator left* ROR — Rotate accumulator right* *Instruction allows parallel data move. F-16 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Device-dependent Information DSP56100 Information F.4.1.3 Bit Manipulation Instructions The DSP56100 instructions used for bit manipulation are: BFCHG — Test bit field and change BFCLR — Clear bit field BFSET — Set bit field BFTSTH — Test bit field high BFTSTL — Test bit field low F.4.1.4 Loop Instructions The DSP56100 instructions used for loop operations are: BRKcc — Exit hardware loop conditionally DO — Start hardware loop DO FOREVER — Start infinite loop ENDDO — Exit from hardware loop F.4.1.5 Move Instructions The DSP56100 instructions used for move operations are: LEA — Load effective address MOVE — Move data* MOVEC — Move control register MOVEI — Move immediate short MOVEM — Move program memory MOVEP — Move peripheral data MOVES — Move absolute short *Instruction allows parallel data move. MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL F-17 Device-dependent Information DSP56100 Information F.4.1.6 Program Control Instructions The DSP56100 instructions used for program control are: Bcc — Branch conditionally BRA — Branch always BScc — Branch to subroutine conditionally BSR — Branch to subroutine DEBUG — Enter debug mode DEBUGcc — Enter debug mode conditionally Jcc — Jump conditionally JMP — Jump JScc — Jump to subroutine conditionally JSR — Jump to subroutine NOP — No operation REP — Repeat next instruction REPcc — Repeat next instruction conditionally RESET — Reset on-chip peripheral devices RTI — Return from interrupt RTS — Return from subroutine STOP — Stop processing (low power standby) SWI — Software interrupt WAIT — Wait for interrupt (low power standby) F.4.2 Register Names and Usage The following DSP56100 register names, in either upper or lower case, cannot be used as symbol names in an assembly language source file: XAA2 X0 A0 X1 A1 YBB2 Y0 B0 Y1 B1 R0 N0 M0 R1 N1 M1 R2 N2 M2 R3 N3 M3 MR CCR SR LC LA SSH SSL OMR F-18 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Device-dependent Information DSP56100 Information The following DSP56100 registers are used by the Assembler in structured control state- ment processing (Chapter 7): A X0Y0R0 F.4.3 Condition Code Mnemonics Following are the DSP56100 condition code mnemonics which correspond to the condi- tional instructions based on the CCR condition codes. These tests may be used in an op- erand comparison expression within a structured control statement (Chapter 7). MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL F-19 Device-dependent Information DSP56300 Information F.5 DSP56300 INFORMATION The Motorola DSP56300 refers to a family of high-speed, low power programmable CMOS processors. The DSP56300 supports 24-bit signed fixed-point fractional arith- metic. F.5.1 Instruction Set Summary DSP56300 instructions can be grouped by function into six types: 1. Arithmetic instructions 2. Logical instructions 3. Bit manipulation instructions 4. Loop instructions 5. Move instructions 6. Program control instructions F-20 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Device-dependent Information DSP56300 Information F.5.1.1 Arithmetic Instructions The DSP56300 instructions used for arithmetic operations are: ABS — Absolute value* ADC — Add long with carry* ADD — Add* ADDL — Shift left then add* ADDR — Shift right then add* ASL — Arithmetic shift accumulator left* ASR — Arithmetic shift accumulator right* CLR — Clear accumulator* CMP — Compare* CMPM — Compare magnitude* CMPU — Compare unsigned DEC — Decrement accumulator DIV — Divide iteration DMAC — Double precision multiply-accumulate INC — Increment accumulator MAC — Signed multiply-accumulate* MACI — Immediate signed multiply-accumulate MACR — Signed multiply-accumulate and round* MACRI — Immediate signed multiply-accumulate and round MACSU — Signed/unsigned multiply-accumulate MACUU — Unsigned multiply-accumulate MPY — Signed multiply* MPYI — Immediate signed multiply MPYR — Signed multiply and round* MPYRI — Immediate signed multiply and round MPYSU — Signed/unsigned multiply MPYUU — Unsigned multiply NEG — Negate accumulator* NORM — Normalize accumulator iteration NORMF — Fast normalize accumulator RND — Round accumulator* SBC — Subtract long with carry* SUB — Subtract* SUBL — Shift left then subtract* SUBR — Shift right then subtract* *Instruction allows parallel data move. MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL F-21 Device-dependent Information DSP56300 Information Tcc — Transfer conditionally TFR — Transfer data ALU register* TST — Test* F.5.1.2 Logical Instructions The DSP56300 instructions used for logical operations are: AND — Logical AND* ANDI — AND Immediate with control register CLB — Count leading bits EOR — Logical exclusive OR* EXTRACT — Extract bit field EXTRACTU — Extract unsigned bit field INSERT — INsert bit field LSL — Logical shift accumulator left* LSR — Logical shift accumulator right* MERGE — Merge two half words NOT — Logical complement on accumulator* OR — Logical inclusive OR* ORI — OR immediate with control register ROL — Rotate accumulator left* ROR — Rotate accumulator right* F.5.1.3 Bit Manipulation Instructions The DSP56300 instructions used for bit manipulation are: BCHG — Bit test and change BCLR — Bit test and clear BSET — Bit test and set BTST — Bit test on memory *Instruction allows parallel data move. F-22 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Device-dependent Information DSP56300 Information F.5.1.4 Loop Instructions The DSP56300 instructions used for loop operations are: BRKcc — Conditionally exit from hardware loop DO — Start hardware loop DO FOREVER — Start infinite hardware loop DOR — Start PC-relative hardware loop DOR FOREVER — Start infinite PC-relative hardware loop ENDDO — Exit from hardware loop F.5.1.5 Move Instructions The DSP56300 instructions used for move operations are: LRA — Load PC-relative address LUA — Load updated address MOVE — Move data* MOVEC — Move control register MOVEM — Move program memory MOVEP — Move peripheral data *Instruction allows parallel data move. MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL F-23 Device-dependent Information DSP56300 Information F.5.1.6 Program Control Instructions The DSP56300 instructions used for program control are: Bcc — Branch conditionally BRA — Branch BRCLR — Branch if bit clear BRSET — Branch if bet set BScc — Branch to subroutine conditionally BSCLR — Branch to subroutine if bit clear BSR — Branch to subroutine BSSET — Branch to subroutine if bit set DEBUG — Enter debug mode DEBUGcc — Enter debug mode conditionally IFcc — Execute conditionally IFcc.U — Execute conditionally and update CCR Jcc — Jump conditionally JCLR — Jump if bit clear JMP — Jump JScc — Jump to subroutine conditionally JSCLR — Jump to subroutine if bit clear JSET — Jump if bit set JSSET — Jump to subroutine if bit set JSR — Jump to subroutine NOP — No operation PFLUSH — Flush program cache PFLUSHUN — Flush program cache unlocked PFREE — Free program cache PLOCK — Program cache sector lock PLOCKR — Program cache relative sector lock PUNLOCK — Program cache sector unlock PUNLOCKR — Program cache relative sector unlock REP — Repeat next instruction RESET — Reset on-chip peripheral devices RTI — Return from interrupt RTS — Return from subroutine STOP — Stop processing (low power standby) TRAP — Software trap TRAPcc — Trap conditionally WAIT — Wait for interrupt (low power standby) F-24 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Device-dependent Information DSP56300 Information F.5.2 Register Names and Usage The following DSP56300 register names, in either upper or lower case, cannot be used as symbol names in an assembly language source file: XAAB X0 A0 BA X1 A1 A10 YBB10 Y0 B0 A2 Y1 B1 B2 R0 N0 M0 MR EP R1 N1 M1 CCR VBA R2 N2 M2 SR SC R3 N3 M3 LC SZ R4 N4 M4 LA COM R5 N5 M5 SSH EOM R6 N6 M6 SSL R7 N7 M7 OMR The following DSP56300 registers are used by the assembler in structured control state- ment processing (Chapter 7): AX0Y0 MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL F-25 Device-dependent Information DSP56300 Information F.5.3 Condition Code Mnemonics Following are the DSP56300 condition code mnemonics which correspond to the condi- tional instructions based on the CCR condition codes. These tests may be used in an op- erand comparison expression within a structured control statement (Chapter 7). F-26 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Device-dependent Information DSP56800 Information F.6 DSP56800 INFORMATION The Motorola DSP56800 refers to a family of high-speed, low power programmable CMOS processors. The DSP56800 supports16-bit signed fixed-point fractional and signed and unsigned integer arithmetic. F.6.1 Instruction Set Summary DSP56800 instructions can be grouped by function into six types: 1. Arithmetic instructions 2. Logical instructions 3. Bit manipulation instructions 4. Loop instructions 5. Move instructions 6. Program control instructions MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL F-27 Device-dependent Information DSP56800 Information F.6.1.1 Arithmetic Instructions The DSP56800 instructions used for arithmetic operations are: ABS — Absolute value* ADC — Add long with carry ADD — Add* ASL — Arithmetic shift accumulator left* ASLL — Multi-bit arithmetic left shift ASR — Arithmetic shift accumulator right* ASRAC — Arithmetic right shift with accumulate ASRR — Multi-bit arithmetic right shift CLR — Clear accumulator* CMP — Compare* DEC(W) — Decrement word* DIV — Divide iteration IMPY(16) — Integer multiply INC(W) — Increment word* MAC — Multiply-accumulate* MACR — Multiply-accumulate and round* MACSU — Signed/unsigned multiply-accumulate MPY — Signed multiply* MPYR — Signed multiply and round* MPYSU — Signed/unsigned multiply NEG — Negate accumulator* NORM — Normalize accumulator iteration RND — Round accumulator* SBC — Subtract long with carry SUB — Subtract* Tcc — Transfer conditionally TFR — Transfer data ALU register* TST — Test accumulator* TSTW — Test register or memory *Instruction allows parallel data move. F-28 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Device-dependent Information DSP56800 Information F.6.1.2 Logical Instructions The DSP56800 instructions used for logical operations are: AND — Logical AND ANDC — AND Immediate with control register EOR — Logical exclusive OR EORC — Logical exclusive OR immediate LSL — Logical shift left LSLL — Multi-bit logical shift left LSR — Logical shift right LSRAC — Logical shift right with accumulate LSRR — Multi-bit logical shift right NOT — Logical complement on accumulator NOTC — Logical complement on accumulator with carry OR — Logical inclusive OR ORC — OR immediate with control register ROL — Rotate accumulator left* ROR — Rotate accumulator right* F.6.1.3 Bit Manipulation Instructions The DSP56800 instructions used for bit manipulation are: BFCHG — Test bit field and change BFCLR — Test bit field and clear BFSET — Test bit field and set BFTSTH — Test bit field high BFTSTL — Test bit field low F.6.1.4 Loop Instructions The DSP56800 instructions used for loop operations are: DO — Start hardware DO loop ENDDO — End current DO loop *Instruction allows parallel data move. MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL F-29 Device-dependent Information DSP56800 Information F.6.1.5 Move Instructions The DSP56800 instructions used for move operations are: LEA — Load effective address MOVE — Move data* MOVEC — Move control register MOVEI — Move immediate MOVEM — Move program memory MOVEP — Move peripheral data MOVES — Move absolute short POP — Pop from stack F.6.1.6 Program Control Instructions The DSP56800 instructions used for program control are: Bcc — Branch conditionally BRA — Branch always BRCLR — Branch if bits clear BRSET — Branch if bits set DEBUG — Enter debug mode ILLEGAL — Illegal instruction interrupt Jcc — Jump conditionally JMP — Jump JSR — Jump to subroutine NOP — No operation REP — Repeat next instruction RTI — Return from interrupt RTS — Return from subroutine STOP — Stop instruction processing (low power standby) SWI — Software interrupt WAIT — Wait for interrupt (low power standby) *Instruction allows parallel data move. F-30 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Device-dependent Information DSP56800 Information F.6.2 Macro Instructions The DSP56800 Macros are defined in the file 56800mac, provided with the CLAS pack- ages in the asm/ directory. These files are made available by including asm/56800mac. For more details on including a file refer to Chapter 6. BVC — Branch if overflow cleared BVS — Branch if overflow bit set. BPL — Branch if plus BMI — Branch if minus BR1CLR — Branch if at least one selected bit is cleared BR1SET — Branch if at least one selected bit is set BEC — Branch if extension cleared BES — Branch if extension set BLMC — Branch if limit cleared BLMS — Branch if limit set JVC — Jump if overflow cleared JVS — Jump if overflow bit set. JPL — Jump if plus JMI — Jump if minus JRCLR — Jump if all selected bits are cleared JRSET — Jump if all selected bits are set JR1SET — Jump if at least one selected bit is set JR1CLR — Jump if at least one selected bit is cleared JEC — Jump if extension bit is cleared JES — Jump if extension bit is set JLMC — Jump if limit cleared JLMS — Jump if limit set PUSH — Push onto stack MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL F-31 Device-dependent Information DSP56800 Information F.6.3 Register Names and Usage The following DSP56800 register names, in either upper or lower case, cannot be used as symbol names in an assembly language source file: X0 YY0Y1 A A0A1A2 B B0B1B2 R0 R1 R2 R3 SP N M01 PC MR CCR SR HWS OMR LA LC F.6.4 Condition Code Mnemonics Following are the DSP56800 condition code mnemonics which correspond to the condi- tional instructions based on the CCR condition codes. These tests may be used in an op- erand comparison expression within a structured control statement (Chapter 7). *Only available when CC bit set in OMR F-32 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Appendix G HOST-DEPENDENT INFORMATION G.1 INTRODUCTION The Motorola DSP development software runs on several host machine and operating system platforms. The following sections give information on hardware requirements, in- stallation, and other topics relating to specific host environments. The descriptions below refer directly to the DSP Assembler, but the sections on hardware requirements and in- stallation apply similarly to the DSP linker and librarian as well. See the appropriate chap- ters in the DSP Linker/Librarian Reference Manual for more information on invocation options and processing of these utilities. G.2 DOS/386 ENVIRONMENT The Motorola DSP Assembler is delivered as an executable file on a CD rom. It may be run from either a floppy drive or a hard disk, although a hard disk is recommended. The Assembler will make use of extended memory if it is present, and will utilize available disk space if physical memory is exhausted. G.2.1 Hardware Requirements The minimum hardware requirements for the Assembler in the DOS/386 environment in- clude: 386-based PC or compatible with 80386 (or higher) CPU, 4MB of RAM, and a CD- rom drive. MS-DOS v3.0 or later. Since the Assembler uses all of available memory for storage of symbols and macros, the optimal system configuration would have at least 4 megabytes of extended memory. The Assembler will make use of extended memory beyond 640K and may even use a virtual memory disk file if necessary. A utility called PMINFO is supplied to provide memory re- gion tuning and virtual file sizing for systems running under Microsoft Windows or other DOS extended memory managers. MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL G-1 Host-dependent Information DOS/386 Environment G.2.2 Installation The Assembler is installed from the distribution CD-rom as part of the CLAS package. A directory on the CD-rom is provided for each supported platform, containing a README file containig the installation instructions G.2.3 Source File Text Input to the Assembler should be in a standard ASCII text file with carriage return/line feed character pairs as line terminators. This type of file is created by most standard text editing programs used on 386 PCs, such as the DOS-supplied editor EDIT. Using word processing packages for creating Assembler input source files is a little more involved, but can certainly be done. Word processing packages use special character en- codings to indicate format and font settings, margins, indentation, and so forth. In some cases these special encodings violate the input requirements of the Assembler, and must be removed or changed. Most word processing programs have a facility for converting internal-format documents to standard ASCII text files. See Chapter 2, Input File Format, for more information on the form and content of Assembler input files. G.2.4 Invoking the Assembler The Assembler is invoked from the DOS command line by entering the name of the As- sembler executable without the extension, followed by any desired options, and finally the names of the source files to be assembled. See Chapter 1, Running The Assembler, for a list of options which can be included on the command line. As an example, if the Assembler diskette was loaded in drive A, and the source file was located on the disk in drive B, the following command at the DOS prompt would assemble the file MYFILE.ASM, putting the object file MYFILE.CLN and the listing file OUT- FILE.LST onto the disk in drive B as output: A:ASM56000 -Bb:myfile.cln -Lb:outfile.lst b:myfile Since DOS supports standard input and output channels, in the example above any warn- ing or error messages would appear both in the listing file and on the standard output (by default the console screen). DOS also supports I/O redirection, so that the Assembler listing can be sent to a file or directly to an output device. Given a hard disk environment where the Assembler execut- able has been loaded into a directory BIN that is in the program search path, the following command will assemble the source file FFT.ASM and send the listing output directly to the Line Printer 1 device: ASM56000 fft.dsp >LPT1: G-2 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Host-dependent Information SunOS/SOLARIS ENVIRONMENT In this example no object file is created and all errors and warnings are sent to LPT1: (e.g. they do not appear on the console screen). The input file is assumed to be in the current directory. See the IBM or Microsoft DOS manual for more information on directory struc- ture, I/O redirection, and command paths. G.3 SUNOS/SOLARIS ENVIRONMENT The Motorola DSP Assembler is delivered on the Development Tools distribution CD-rom written in SunOS tar format. G.3.1 Hardware Requirements The Assembler will run on any SparcStation 2 or higher running SunOS version 4.0 or lat- er or SOLARIS 2.5 or later. A CR-rom drive is required for installation. G.3.2 Installation See the readme file in the SunOS and SOLARIS directories on the CD-rom for installation instructions. The Assembler may be placed in any generally accessible area, usually /usr/bin or /usr/ local/bin. Be sure that it is located in a directory listing in the PATH environment variable of those who need to use it. Also, insure that the execute access bits for the file are set when it is copied to disk; this can be done with the chmod utility (see your User Manual for information on chmod). G.3.3 Source File Text Input to the Assembler should be a standard ASCII text file with newline characters (ASCII LF, 0AH) as line terminators. This type of file is created by the standard Unix text editors such as vi, and by other editors which run in the SunOS environment such as Emacs. Assembler source code imported from other environments may need to be converted, de- pending on the level of filtering done on the code when it was transferred to the Sun sys- tem. Binary text files sent from, for example, a PC or compatible machine will need to have carriage return characters (ASCII CR, 0DH) and possibly end-of-file markers (ASCII SUB, 1AH) stripped before being processed by the Assembler. G.3.4 Invoking the Assembler The Assembler is invoked from the shell (usually csh in SunOS) by entering the name of the Assembler executable, followed by any desired options, and finally the names of the source files to be assembled. See Chapter 1, Running The Assembler, for a list of options which can be included on the command line. MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL G-3 Host-dependent Information HP 700 Environment As an example, if the Assembler executable was located in a directory listed in the user PATH environment variable, the following command would assemble the file myfile.asm in the current working directory, putting the object file myfile in the objects subdirectory and the listing file outfile into the listings subdirectory: asm96000 -bobjects/myfile.cln -llistings/outfile.lst myfile Since SunOS supports standard input and output channels, in the example above any warning or error messages would appear both in the listing file and on the standard output (by default the terminal screen). SunOS also supports I/O redirection, so that the Assembler listing can be sent to a file or arbitrary output device. Assume a user wanted a list of errors from the assembly, but a full source code listing was not required. This can be accomplished with the following Assem- bler command line: asm96000 -l/dev/null test >test.err In this example no object file is created and all errors and warnings are routed to the file test.err. The input file test.asm is assumed to be in the current working directory. Note that the -L option is used to send the full Assembler listing to the null device. G.4 HP 700 ENVIRONMENT The Motorola DSP Assembler is delivered a CD-rom written in tar format. G.4.1 Hardware Requirements The Assembler will run on any HP 700 series workstation running HP-UX. G.4.2 Installation See the file readme in directory hp on the installation CD-rom for installation instructions. The Assembler may be placed in any generally accessible area, usually /usr/bin or /usr/ local/bin. Be sure that it is located in a directory listing in the PATH environment variable of those who need to use it. Also, insure that the execute access bits for the file are set when it is copied to disk; this can be done with the chmod utility (see your User Manual for information on chmod). G.4.3 Source File Text Input to the Assembler should be a standard ASCII text file with newline characters (ASCII LF, 0AH) as line terminators. This type of file is created by the standard Unix text editors such as vi, and by other editors which run in the HP-UX environment such as Emacs. G-4 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Host-dependent Information HP 700 Environment Assembler source code imported from other environments may need to be converted, de- pending on the level of filtering done on the code when it was transferred to the HP sys- tem. Binary text files sent from, for example, a PC or compatible machine will need to have carriage return characters (ASCII CR, 0DH) and possibly end-of-file markers (ASCII SUB, 1AH) stripped before being processed by the Assembler. G.4.4 Invoking the Assembler The Assembler is invoked from the shell (usually ksh in HP-UX) by entering the name of the Assembler executable, followed by any desired options, and finally the names of the source files to be assembled. See Chapter 1, Running The Assembler, for a list of options which can be included on the command line. As an example, if the Assembler executable was located in a directory listed in the user PATH environment variable, the following command would assemble the file myfile.asm in the current working directory, putting the object file myfile in the objects subdirectory and the listing file outfile into the listings subdirectory: asm96000 -bobjects/myfile.cln -llistings/outfile.lst myfile Since HP-UX supports standard input and output channels, in the example above any warning or error messages would appear both in the listing file and on the standard output (by default the terminal screen). HP-UX also supports I/O redirection, so that the Assembler listing can be sent to a file or arbitrary output device. Assume a user wanted a list of errors from the assembly, but a full source code listing was not required. This can be accomplished with the following Assem- bler command line: asm96000 -l/dev/null test >test.err In this example no object file is created and all errors and warnings are routed to the file test.err. The input file test.asm is assumed to be in the current working directory. Note that the -L option is used to send the full Assembler listing to the null device. MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL G-5 Index INDEX Symbols — A — ! ...... 3-4 Absolute expression ...... 3-1 - ...... 3-4, 3-5 Absolute mode ...... 1-3, 1-10 != ...... 3-6 Address assignment ...... 4-6 " ...... 6-1, 6-13 Addressing # ...... 6-1, 6-22 I/O short ...... 6-19 #< ...... 6-2, 6-23 immediate ...... 6-22 #> ...... 6-2, 6-24 long ...... 6-21 % ...... 3-5, 6-1, 6-11 long immediate ...... 6-24 & ...... 3-6 short ...... 6-20, 6-76 && ...... 3-7 short immediate ...... 6-23 * ...... 3-5, 6-1, 6-16 ASCII codes ...... A-1 + ...... 3-4, 3-5 Assembler ++ ...... 6-1, 6-17, 6-18 command line ...... 1-1 / ...... 3-5 device ...... F-1 ; ...... 6-1, 6-6 error ...... C-13 ;; ...... 6-1, 6-7 fatal error ...... C-44 < ...... 3-6, 6-1, 6-20 hardware ...... G-1, G-3, G-4, G-6 << ...... 3-5, 6-1, 6-19 host ...... G-1 installation ... 1-1, G-2, G-3, G-5, G-6 <= ...... 3-6 mode ...... 6-66 == ...... 3-6 operation 1-1, 1-3, G-2, G-4, G-5, G-7 > ...... 3-6, 6-1, 6-21 option ...... 1-6, 6-69 >= ...... 3-6 output ...... 2-6 >> ...... 3-5 processing ...... 1-9 ? ...... 6-1, 6-10 verbose ...... 1-8 @ ...... 6-1, 6-15 warning ...... 6-77, C-4 \ ...... 6-1, 6-8 Assembly language ...... 1-1 ^ ...... 3-6, 6-1, 6-12 | ...... 3-6 — B — || ...... 3-7 Bootstrap mode ...... 4-20 ~ ...... 3-4 MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL I-1 Index Buffer ...... 1-10 Cycle count ...... 6-72 address ...... 6-25 circular ...... 4-11 — D — end ...... 6-46 Data Byte-wide ...... 6-73 block ...... E-31 Data hiding ...... 4-2 — C — Data transfer field ...... 2-5 Checksum ...... 6-72 Debug ...... 1-5 COFF ...... E-1, E-27 Directive ...... 6-1 Command line ...... 1-1 .BREAK ...... 6-4, 7-2, B-3 input ...... 1-4 .CONTINUE ...... 6-4, 7-3, B-3 Command line option ...... 1-2 .ELSE ...... 6-4, B-3 -A ...... 1-3 .ENDF ...... 6-4, B-3 -B ...... 1-3 .ENDI ...... 6-4, B-3 -D ...... 1-3 .ENDL ...... 6-4, B-3 -EA ...... 1-4 .ENDW ...... 6-4, B-3 -EW ...... 1-4 .FOR ...... 6-4, 7-4, B-3 -F ...... 1-4 .IF ...... 6-4, 7-5, B-3 -G ...... 1-5 .LOOP ...... 6-4, 7-6, B-3 -I ...... 1-5 .REPEAT ...... 6-4, 7-7, B-3 -L ...... 1-5 .UNTIL ...... 6-4, B-3 -M ...... 1-6 .WHILE ...... 6-4, 7-7, B-3 -O ...... 1-6 assembly control ...... 6-2, B-1 -P ...... 1-6 BADDR ...... 6-3, 6-25, B-2 -Q ...... 1-7 BSB ...... 6-3, 6-26, B-2 -R ...... 1-7 BSC ...... 6-3, 6-27, B-2 -V ...... 1-8 BSM ...... 6-3, 6-28, B-2 -Z ...... 1-8 BUFFER ...... 6-3, 6-29, B-2 Comment ...... 6-31 COBJ ...... 6-4, 6-30, B-3 delimiter ...... 6-6 COMMENT ...... 6-2, 6-31, B-1 object file ...... 6-30, E-27, E-31 data definition ...... 6-3, B-2 unreported ...... 6-7 DC ...... 6-3, 6-32, B-2 Comment field ...... 2-6 DCB ...... 6-3, 6-33, B-2 Conditional assembly 5-1, 5-9, 6-58, 6-72 DEFINE 1-3, 6-2, 6-13, 6-34, 6-72, B-1 Constant ...... 3-3 DS ...... 6-3, 6-35, B-2 binary ...... 3-3 DSM ...... 6-3, 6-36, B-2 decimal ...... 3-3 DSR ...... 6-3, 6-37, B-2 define ...... 6-32, 6-33 DUP ...... 5-9, 6-4, 6-38, B-3 hexadecimal ...... 3-3 DUPA ...... 5-9, 6-4, 6-40, B-3 storage ...... 6-27 DUPC ...... 5-9, 6-4, 6-42, B-3 string ...... 3-4 DUPF ...... 5-9, 6-4, 6-43, B-3 I-2 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Index END ...... 6-2, 6-45, B-1 SYMOBJ ...... 6-4, 6-96, B-3 ENDBUF ...... 6-3, 6-46, B-2 TABS ...... 6-3, 6-97, B-2 ENDIF ...... 6-4, 6-47, B-3 TITLE ...... 6-3, 6-98, B-2 ENDM ...... 5-2, 6-4, 6-48, B-3 UNDEF ...... 6-2, 6-99, B-1 ENDSEC ...... 6-3, 6-49, B-2 WARN ...... 6-2, 6-100, B-1 EQU ...... 6-3, 6-50, B-2 XDEF ...... 4-2, 6-3, 6-101, B-2 EXITM ...... 6-4, 6-51, B-3 XREF ...... 4-2, 6-3, 6-102, B-2 FAIL ...... 6-2, 6-52, B-1 DSP56000 ...... F-2 FORCE ...... 6-2, 6-53, B-1 condition code ...... F-7 GLOBAL ...... 6-3, 6-54, B-2 instruction set ...... F-2 GSET ...... 6-3, 6-55, B-2 register ...... F-6 HIMEM ...... 6-2, 6-56, B-1 DSP5616 ...... F-15, F-27 IDENT ...... 6-4, 6-57, B-3 condition code ...... F-19, F-32 IF ...... 5-9, 6-4, 6-58, B-3 instruction set ...... F-15, F-27 in loop ...... 6-72 register ...... F-18, F-31, F-32 INCLUDE ...... 6-2, 6-59, B-1 DSP56300 ...... F-20 LIST ...... 6-3, 6-60, B-2 condition code ...... F-26 listing control ...... 6-3, B-2 instruction set ...... F-20 LOCAL ...... 6-3, 6-61, B-2 register ...... F-25 LOMEM ...... 6-2, 6-62, B-1 DSP96000 ...... F-8 LSTCOL ...... 6-3, 6-63, B-2 condition code ...... F-14 MACLIB ...... 1-6, 5-2, 6-4, 6-64, B-3 instruction set ...... F-8 MACRO ...... 5-2, 6-4, 6-65, B-3 register ...... F-13 macro ...... 6-4, B-3 DSPASMOPT ...... 1-2 MODE ...... 4-5, 6-2, 6-66, B-1 Dual read ...... 6-72 MSG ...... 6-2, 6-67, B-1 NOLIST ...... 6-3, 6-68, B-2 — E — object file ...... 6-4, B-3 Environment variable ...... 1-2 OPT ...... 1-6, 6-3, 6-69, B-2 Error ORG ...... 4-7, 6-2, 6-79, B-1 command line ...... C-2 PAGE ...... 6-3, 6-83, B-2 fatal ...... C-44 PMACRO ...... 6-4, 6-85, B-3 output ...... 1-4 PRCTL ...... 6-3, 6-86, B-2 Expression ...... 3-1 RADIX ...... 6-2, 6-87, B-1 RDIRECT ...... 5-1, 6-2, 6-88, B-1 absolute ...... 3-1 SCSJMP ...... 6-2, 6-89, B-1 address ...... 6-72 SCSREG ...... 6-2, 6-90, B-1 compound ...... 7-10 SECTION ...... 6-3, 6-91, B-2 condition code ...... 7-8 SET ...... 4-3, 6-3, 6-94, B-2 constant ...... 3-3 STITLE ...... 6-3, 6-95, B-2 formatting ...... 7-10 structured control ...... 6-4, B-3 function ...... 3-7 symbol definition ...... 6-3, B-2 internal representation ...... 3-3 MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL I-3 Index object file ...... E-31 L10 ...... 3-8, 3-14 operand comparison ...... 7-9 LCV ...... 3-10, 3-15 operator ...... 3-4 LEN ...... 3-9, 3-15 radix ...... 6-87 LFR ...... 3-9, 3-15 relative ...... 3-1 LNG ...... 3-9, 3-16 simple ...... 7-8 LOG ...... 3-8, 3-16 LST ...... 3-10, 3-16 — F — LUN ...... 3-9, 3-16 File MAC ...... 3-9, 3-16 command line ...... 1-4 macro ...... 3-9 include ...... 1-5, 6-59 mathematical ...... 3-8 input ...... 2-1 MAX ...... 3-8, 3-17 listing ...... 1-5, 2-6, 6-73 MIN ...... 3-8, 3-17 macro ...... 1-6 miscellaneous ...... 3-10 object ...... 1-3, E-1 MSP ...... 3-10, 3-17 output ...... 1-8 MXP ...... 3-9, 3-17 source ...... 1-8, 2-1 POS ...... 3-9 Function ...... 3-7, 6-15 POW ...... 3-8, 3-17, 3-18 REL ...... 3-10, 3-18 ABS ...... 3-8, 3-10 RND ...... 3-8, 3-18 ACS ...... 3-8, 3-10 RVB ...... 3-9, 3-18 ARG ...... 3-9, 3-10 SCP ...... 3-9, 3-19 ASN ...... 3-8, 3-11 SGN ...... 3-8, 3-19 AT2 ...... 3-8, 3-11 SIN ...... 3-8, 3-19 ATN ...... 3-8, 3-11 SNH ...... 3-8, 3-19 CCC ...... 3-10, 3-11 SQT ...... 3-8, 3-19 CEL ...... 3-8, 3-11 string ...... 3-9 CHK ...... 3-10 TAN ...... 3-8, 3-20 CNT ...... 3-9, 3-12 TNH ...... 3-8, 3-20 COH ...... 3-8, 3-12 UNF ...... 3-9, 3-20 conversion ...... 3-9 XPN ...... 3-8, 3-20 COS ...... 3-8, 3-12 CTR ...... 3-10, 3-12 — I — CVF ...... 3-9, 3-13 CVI ...... 3-9, 3-13 Include file ...... 1-5, 6-59 CVS ...... 3-9, 3-13 DEF ...... 3-10, 3-13 — L — EXP ...... 3-10, 3-13 Label ...... 2-3 FLD ...... 3-9, 3-14 local ...... 2-3, 5-3, 5-8, 6-74, 6-77 FLR ...... 3-8, 3-14 Label field ...... 2-3 FRC ...... 3-9, 3-14 Line continuation ...... 6-8 INT ...... 3-10, 3-14 Line number ...... E-10 I-4 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Index Listing file ...... 1-5, 2-6, 6-73 — O — commentary ...... D-1 Object file ...... 1-3 cross-reference ...... D-3 auxiliary entry ...... E-20 format 6-63, 6-73, 6-76, 6-83, 6-97, D-1 comment ...... 6-30, E-27, E-31 sub-title ...... 6-95 data expression ...... E-31 title ...... 6-98 differences ...... E-27 Load address ...... 1-9 file header ...... E-3 Load counter format ...... E-1 alignment ...... 6-72, 6-74 identification ...... 6-57 Load location counter ...... 1-10 line number ...... E-10 Load memory space ...... 1-9, 1-10 optional header ...... E-4 Local label ...... 2-3 relocation ...... E-9, E-30 macro ...... 2-4 section ...... E-6 Location counter ...... 6-16, 6-79 section number ...... E-14 storage class ...... E-16 — M — structure ...... E-1 Macro ...... 5-1 structure size ...... E-30 call ...... 5-4, 6-74 symbol ...... 6-77, 6-96 comment ...... 6-72 symbol name ...... E-13 definition ...... 5-2, 6-65, 6-74 symbol table ...... E-11 directive ...... 6-65 symbol type ...... E-14 end ...... 6-48 symbol value ...... E-13 exit ...... 6-51 transportability ...... E-29 expansion ...... 5-4, 6-74 Operand 2 field ...... 2-5 file ...... 1-6 Operand field ...... 2-5 library ...... 5-2, 6-64, 6-74 Operation 2 field ...... 2-5 purge ...... 6-85 Operation field ...... 2-4 Macro argument Operator ...... 3-4 concatenation operator ...... 5-5, 6-8 arithmetic ...... 3-5 local label override ...... 5-8 bitwise ...... 3-6 local label override operator ...... 6-12 logical ...... 3-7 return hex value operator ...5-7, 6-11 precedence ...... 3-7 return value operator ...... 5-6, 6-10 relational ...... 3-6 string operator ...... 5-7 shift ...... 3-5 Memory unary ...... 3-4 limit ...... 6-56, 6-62 Option reserve ...... 6-76 AE ...... 6-70, 6-72 utilization ...... 2-6, 6-74, D-3, D-5 AL ...... 6-71, 6-72 Memory space ...... 1-9, 6-74, 6-79 assembler operation ...... 6-71 attribute ...... 3-1 CC ...... 6-70, 6-72 CEX ...... 6-70, 6-72 MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL I-5 Index CK ...... 6-71, 6-72 NOCM ...... 6-74 CL ...... 6-70, 6-72 NOCONST ...... 6-74 CM ...... 6-70, 6-72 NODBL ...... 6-74 CONST ...... 6-71, 6-72, 6-74 NODEX ...... 6-74 CONTC ...... 6-70, 6-72 NODLD ...... 6-74 CONTCK ...... 6-71, 6-72 NODXL ...... 6-74 CRE ...... 6-70, 6-72 NOFC ...... 6-75 DBL ...... 6-71, 6-72 NOFF ...... 6-75 DEX ...... 6-71, 6-72 NOFM ...... 6-75 DLD ...... 6-71, 6-72 NOGS ...... 6-75 DXL ...... 6-70, 6-72 NOHDR ...... 6-75 EM ...... 6-71, 6-73 NOIDW ...... 6-75 FC ...... 6-69, 6-73 NOINTR ...... 6-75 FF ...... 6-69, 6-73 NOMC ...... 6-75 FM ...... 6-69, 6-73 NOMD ...... 6-75 GL ...... 6-71, 6-73 NOMEX ...... 6-75 GS ...... 6-71, 6-73 NOMI ...... 6-75 HDR ...... 6-70, 6-73 NOMSW ...... 6-75 IC ...... 6-71, 6-73 NONDE ...... 6-75 IDW ...... 6-70, 6-73 NONL ...... 6-75 IL ...... 6-70, 6-73 NONS ...... 6-75 INTR ...... 6-71, 6-73 NOPP ...... 6-75 LB ...... 6-71, 6-73 NOPS ...... 6-75 LBX ...... 6-71, 6-73 NOPSB ...... 6-75 LDB ...... 6-71, 6-73 NOPSM ...... 6-75 listing format ...... 6-69 NORC ...... 6-75 LOC ...... 6-70, 6-74 NORP ...... 6-75 MC ...... 6-70, 6-74 NORSV ...... 6-75 MD ...... 6-70, 6-74 NOSCL ...... 6-75 message ...... 6-70 NOSI ...... 6-76 MEX ...... 6-70, 6-74 NOSMS ...... 6-76 MI ...... 6-71, 6-74 NOU ...... 6-76 MSW ...... 6-70, 6-74 NOUR ...... 6-76 MU ...... 6-70, 6-74 NOW ...... 6-76 NDE ...... 6-70, 6-74 NS ...... 6-71, 6-76 NL ...... 6-70, 6-74 PP ...... 6-69, 6-76 NOAE ...... 6-74 PS ...... 6-71, 6-76 NOAL ...... 6-74 PSB ...... 6-71, 6-76 NOCC ...... 6-74 PSM ...... 6-71, 6-76 NOCEX ...... 6-74 RC ...... 6-69, 6-76 NOCK ...... 6-74 reporting ...... 6-70 NOCL ...... 6-74 RP ...... 6-71, 6-76 I-6 DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL MOTOROLA Index RSV ...... 6-71, 6-76 header ...... E-7 S ...... 6-70, 6-76 local ...... 4-3, 6-61, 6-91 SBM ...... 6-71, 6-76 macro ...... 4-4 SCL ...... 6-71, 6-77 nested ...... 4-4, 6-76 SCO ...... 6-71, 6-77 relocation ...... 4-5 SI ...... 6-71, 6-77 static ...... 4-6, 6-73, 6-91 SMS ...... 6-71, 6-77 symbol ...... 4-2 SO ...... 6-71, 6-77 Source file ...... 1-8, 2-1 SVO ...... 6-71 end ...... 6-45 symbol ...... 6-71 format ...... 2-2, G-2, G-4, G-5, G-6 U ...... 6-70, 6-77 Stall UR ...... 6-70, 6-77 pipeline ...... 6-73, 6-75 W ...... 6-70, 6-77 String ...... 2-2 WEX ...... 6-77 concatenation ...... 2-2, 6-17, 6-18 XLL ...... 6-71, 6-77 delimiter ...... 6-13 XR ...... 6-71, 6-78 packed ...... 6-76 Overlay ...... 1-9, 4-9, 4-16 position ...... 3-17 bootstrap ...... 4-20 substring ...... 2-2 Symbol ...... 2-1 — P — case ...... 6-73 Pipeline stall ...... 6-73, 6-75 cross-reference ...... 6-72 Processor equate ...... 6-50, 6-72, 6-74 revision ...... 1-6, 1-7 global ...... 6-73 Program counter ...... 6-16, 6-79 listing ...... 6-76 set ...... 6-55, 6-76, 6-77, 6-94 — R — strip ...... 1-8 undefined ...... 6-77 Relative expression ...... 3-1 Relative mode ...... 1-10 — W — Relocation ...... E-9, E-30 Warning ...... 6-77, C-4 Runtime address ...... 1-10 Runtime location counter ...... 1-10 Runtime memory space ...... 1-10 — S — Section ...... 4-1, 6-91 block data ...... E-31 data hiding ...... 4-2 end ...... 6-49 fragmented ...... 4-4 global ...... 4-3, 6-54, 6-73, 6-91 MOTOROLA DSP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL I-7 — higher — higher or same * — higher than * — higher than or same